Treo 700p - Smartphone PALM - Free user manual and instructions

Type de produit	Smartphone
Marque	Palm
Modèle	Treo 700p
Système d'exploitation	Palm OS 5.4.9
Processeur	Intel XScale 312 MHz
Mémoire RAM	128 Mo
Stockage interne	60 Mo disponibles
Écran	320 x 320 pixels, couleur TFT
Réseau	CDMA2000 1xEV-DO
Appareil photo	1,3 mégapixels (selon modèle)
Connectivité	Bluetooth 1.2, Infrarouge, USB
Emplacement carte mémoire	SD/MMC/SDIO
Batterie	Lithium-Ion rechargeable, 1800 mAh
Dimensions	112 x 58 x 23 mm
Poids	181 g (avec batterie)
Clavier	QWERTY complet
Navigation	5 directions + stylet
Fonctions principales	Téléphone, email, messagerie, Web, appareil photo, musique, organisateur
Entretien et nettoyage	Essuyer avec un chiffon doux et sec. Ne pas utiliser de produits agressifs.
Sécurité	Verrouillage par code, Keyguard, cryptage
Pièces détachées et réparabilité	Batterie remplaçable, carte mémoire amovible
Informations générales	Manuel utilisateur disponible en PDF sur notice-facile.com

Frequently Asked Questions - Treo 700p PALM

Comment allumer et éteindre le téléphone sur le Treo 700p ?

Pour allumer le téléphone, appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton Power/End jusqu'à entendre une tonalité ascendante. Pour éteindre, faites de même jusqu'à la tonalité descendante. L'écran peut être allumé/éteint indépendamment.

Comment installer la batterie dans le Treo 700p ?

Appuyez sur le loquet du compartiment batterie à l'arrière, faites glisser le couvercle vers le bas, insérez la batterie à un angle de 45° en alignant les contacts, puis replacez le couvercle jusqu'au déclic.

Comment configurer la messagerie vocale ?

Ouvrez l'application Phone et maintenez enfoncée la touche 1 pour composer la messagerie vocale. Suivez les invites pour créer un mot de passe, enregistrer votre annonce et votre message d'accueil.

Comment synchroniser le Treo 700p avec un ordinateur ?

Installez le logiciel de synchronisation à partir du CD fourni. Connectez le câble USB au Treo et à l'ordinateur, puis appuyez sur le bouton Sync du câble. La synchronisation met à jour vos contacts, calendrier, tâches et notes.

Comment utiliser le Bluetooth sur le Treo 700p ?

Accédez à Applications > Bluetooth et activez-le. Pour appairer un casque ou kit mains-libres, sélectionnez Configurer périphériques > Configuration mains-libres et suivez les instructions en saisissant un code d'appairage.

Comment prendre une photo avec le Treo 700p ?

Ouvrez l'application Pics&Videos et utilisez la touche de l'appareil photo sur le côté ou l'écran pour cadrer. Appuyez sur le bouton central pour capturer. Vous pouvez ajuster la résolution et d'autres paramètres avant la prise de vue.

Comment configurer un compte email sur le Treo 700p ?

Utilisez l'application VersaMail. Ouvrez-la, allez dans Menus > Comptes > Nouveau et saisissez les paramètres de votre fournisseur d'accès (POP3/IMAP). Vous pouvez également synchroniser avec Outlook.

Comment naviguer sur Internet avec le Treo 700p ?

Ouvrez le navigateur Web via le bouton dédié ou le lanceur d'applications. Assurez-vous que le service Sprint PCS Vision est activé. Saisissez une URL ou utilisez les favoris.

Comment transférer de la musique sur le Treo 700p ?

Connectez le Treo à l'ordinateur via USB. Utilisez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers MP3. Vous pouvez également copier des fichiers sur une carte mémoire SD et les lire avec l'application Pocket Tunes.

Que faire si le Treo 700p ne répond plus ?

Effectuez un soft reset en appuyant sur le bouton de réinitialisation situé à l'arrière (sous la batterie) avec un stylet. Si cela ne résout pas le problème, un hard reset (en maintenant le bouton Power enfoncé) effacera toutes les données ; faites une sauvegarde d'abord.

USER MANUAL Treo 700p PALM

Abstract yellow graphic with flowing curved lines and the letters 'TM' at the bottom (no text or symbols in the graphic itself)

Sprint PCS® Service

Sprint Power Vision Smart Device

Treo™ 700p by Palm

www.sprint.com

© Sprint Nextel. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in part without prior written approval. Sprint, the “Going Forward” logo, and other trademarks are trademarks of Sprint Nextel.

Printed in the U.S.A.

PN: 406-10412-00

v.10

Intellectual Property Notices

© 2006 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm, Palm OS, Treo device, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo device logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm, Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.'s NetFront 3.0 Internet browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and is used under a license. A portion of this software includes software modules developed by the Independent JPEG group. Documents To Go is a trademark or registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. A portion of the enclosed product is © copyrighted by Fraunhofer IIS (2005). GoodLink is a trademark or registered trademark of Good Technology, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Excel, and PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.

This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:

6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957,397;
6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490;
6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780;
6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699;
6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047;
6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638;
6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044
;6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148 ;6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202;
6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824;
6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650;
6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423;
6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128;
D478,091. Patent pending.

This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.

MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary.

All rights reserved.

Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability

Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.

Table of Contents

Welcome to Sprint .... i

How to Use This Guide ....ii

Section 1: Setting Up Your Smart Device and Your Computer .....1

1A. Setting Up Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700 _P by Palm .... 3

What You Need ....4

Your New Treo 700 _P Smart Device 6

Inserting the Battery ....11

Charging the Battery 13

1B. Setting Up Service 19

Making Your First Call 20

Setting Up Your Voicemail 23

Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords 24

1C. Connecting to Your Computer 25

Why Connect My Device to My Computer? 26

Upgrading From Another Palm OS ^® Device 27

Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software 30

Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer 32

Synchronizing Information—The Basics 33

Section 2: Your Treo™ 700P Smart Device ....37

2A. Moving Around on Your Smart Device 39

Moving Around the Device Screen 40

Using the Keyboard 45

Opening Applications ....50

2B. Using Your Device's Phone Features 53

Turning Your Device On and Off 54

Opening the Phone Application 56

Making Calls 57

Receiving Calls 62

Using Voicemail 64

Managing Active Calls....67

Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command 76

Defining Favorite Buttons 78

Using a Phone Headset 82

Customizing Phone Settings 88

Controlling Your Roaming Experience 98

Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status ....100

Section 3: Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other Wireless Connections ... 105

3A. Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics .... 107

Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision 108

Sprint Power Vision Features ....109

Accessing Sprint PCS Vision 111

3B. Sprint Power Vision ^SM ..... 113

Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision ....114

Personalizing Your Service With On Demand ....115

Using Your Device's Phone as a Modem ....118

3C. Using Email 121

What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device? ....122

The VersaMail Application ....124

Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM .....142

Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging ....143

3D. Messaging ....145

Creating and Sending Messages ....146

Receiving Messages ....151

Using Messaging to Chat ....154

Managing Your Messages ....155

Customizing Your Messaging Settings ....156

Using Online Services ....158

3E. Browsing the Web .....159

Viewing a Web Page 160

Working With Web Pages 163

Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages ....167

Customizing Your Web Browser Settings 170

3F. Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking .....173

Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology .....174

Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem 178

Section 4: Your Portable Media Device 183

4A. Working With Your Pictures and Videos .....185

Taking Pictures and Videos ....186

Customizing Your Camera Settings ....191

Viewing Pictures and Videos 193

Organizing Pictures and Videos ....195

Using Your Online Album 200

Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer ....202

4B. Listening to Music 203

Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3 204

Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer 206

Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device 208

Listening to Music on Your Treo Device 209

4C. Watching Sprint TV ^SM ..... 213

Accessing Streamed Media 214

Viewing Streamed Media 216

Section 5: Your Mobile Organizer 217

5A. Using Your Device's Organizer Features 219

Contacts 220

Calendar 224

Tasks 235

Memos ....240

5B. Increasing Your Productivity 241

Using the Documents Application to Work With Your Office Files .....242

Voice Memo 244

World Clock....246

Calculator 248

Section 6: Managing Your Information and Settings .... 251

6A.Managing Files and Applications 253

Using Find 254

Installing Applications ....255

Removing Applications ....258

Viewing Application Information ....260

Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ....261

Beaming Information ....264

Synchronizing Information—Advanced 268

Using Expansion Cards ......276

6B. Customizing Your Device 283

Setting System Sounds ....284

Adjusting the Display and Appearance ....286

Changing the Applications Settings ....290

Customizing Device Buttons 292

Setting the Date and Time ....294

Optimizing Power Settings ....296

Locking Your Device and Information ....297

Using Connection Settings ....306

Purchasing Accessories for Your Device 307

Section 7: Resources .... 309

7A. Help 311

Trouble Upgrading? 312

Resetting Your Treo 700 _P Smart Device ....314

Replacing the Battery ....317

Troubleshooting 319

Making Room on Your Treo 700 _P Smart Device .....346

Third-Party Applications ....347

Errors 349

Where to Learn More....350

7B. Glossary 353

Section 8: Safety and Specifications .... 359

8A. Important Safety Information 361

General Precautions....362

Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device 363

Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device 366

Caring for the Battery 368

Radiofrequency (RF) Energy 370

Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device 373

Owner's Record 375

User's Guide Proprietary Notice ....375

8B. Specifications 377

Specifications 378

Index 381

Welcome to Sprint

Sprint and Nextel have come together offering you more choice and flexibility to do whatever you want, whenever you want.

This powerful combination brings you access to more products, more services, and more of what you need to do more of what you want. Welcome to a future full of possibility. Welcome to the new Sprint.

Welcome and thank you for choosing Sprint.

How to Use This Guide

We know you're eager to start using your device right away, and the sections of this guide are designed to help you do just that.

Section 1: Setting Up Your Smart Device and Your Computer guides you through the process of setting up your new Treo™ 700p smart device, your Sprint PCS® Service, and your computer.

Section 2: Your Treo™ 700p Smart Device shows you the basics of your device and service with quick, easy-to-follow instructions. This section also describes the features of your device's phone and shows you how to use Sprint PCS service features such as voicemail, call waiting, and call forwarding.

Section 3: Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other Wireless Connections shows you how to use Sprint PCS Vision features, including Web browsing, messaging, and email. It also describes other types of wireless connections such as Bluetooth® wireless technology.

Section 4: Your Portable Media Device shows you how to use your device's camera—including how to use the Sprint PCS® Picture Mail application—and how to transfer and listen to music files on your device.

Section 5: Your Mobile Organizer guides you through the process of using the built-in, full-featured, Palm OS® organizer that gives you instant access to your Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, Calculator, and more.

Section 6: Managing Your Information and Settings describes the tools for managing files and applications and the preferences that enable you to customize your device.

Section 7: Resources answers frequently asked questions and shows you what to do if something goes wrong. It also includes a helpful glossary of terms.

Section 8: Safety and Specifications outlines recommended safety and maintenance guidelines and displays the technical specifications for your Treo 700 P smart device.

WARNING:

Please refer to “Important Safety Information” on page 361 to learn about information that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to read and follow the Important Safety Information in this phone guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.

Setting Up Your Smart Device and Your Computer

Sprint

Setting Up Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700P by Palm

In This Section

What You Need
Your New Treo 700® Smart Device
- Inserting the Battery
Charging the Battery

What You Need

Your Treo™ 700 _P smart device box contains the following:

Hardware

• Treo device
  • Rechargeable battery
• AC charger
  •USB sync cable
  Stereo headset
  Sprint® charger adapter

Documentation

• Read This First poster
• Welcome to Sprint pamphlet
• Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700 _P by Palm Quick Reference Guide
• Email on Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700 _P by Palm booklet
  • Introducing the Sprint Power Vision Network pamphlet
• Terms & Conditions
  Warranty
• Software License Agreement
  Audible insert

4 Section 1A: Device Setup

Software

- Palm Software Installation CD (includes desktop synchronization software and bonus software for your device)

You'll also need the following items to complete the installation and activation:

• An activated Sprint PCS® service plan
  ●A location with wireless coverage for your device
  • An electrical outlet
• The computer with which you will synchronize your personal information

Your New Treo 700 _P Smart Device

Your Device's Features: Front View

6 Section 1A: Device Setup

1. Indicator Light provides status information for your device based on the color of the light and the blink state.
2. Earpiece serves as the speaker on your device when you are not using the speakerphone feature or a headset.
3. 5-way Navigator gives you one-handed access to moving around the device screen and selecting options. See “Moving Around the Device Screen” on page 40 for instructions.
4. Power/End Button turns the device's phone on and off, wakes up and turns off the screen, and hangs up calls.
5. Applications Button opens Applications view.
6. Menu Button opens the application menus.
7. Messaging Button opens the Messaging application. If you downloaded and installed the Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM application, this button opens Business Connection (see “Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM ” on page 142 for information).
8. Calendar Button opens the Calendar application.
9. Phone Button opens the Phone application.
10. Talk Button dials when a phone number is selected or entered, and answers an incoming phone call.
11. Side Button records voice memos by default, and performs context-sensitive actions when an application is open, such as playing or pausing MP3 files in the Pocket Tunes™ application. You can also reassign this button to open your favorite application.
12. Volume Button adjusts the earpiece, speaker, and ringer volume levels.

Your Device's Features: Back View

1. Camera Lens enables you to take pictures using the built-in camera (if included). There are two models of the Treo 700p smart device: One comes with a camera and the other does not. The packaging for your device identifies whether a camera is included.
2. Self-Portrait Mirror enables you to take a picture of yourself (if your device includes a camera).
3. Battery Door Release opens the battery compartment.

8 Section 1A: Device Setup

1. Headset Jack enables you to connect a hands-free headset. Use only headsets that are compatible with your device.
2. Multi-connector enables you to attach the USB sync cable and AC charger to your device. You can connect the charger either to the sync cable connector or directly to the charger jack on the Multi-connector.
3. Microphone serves as the mouthpiece on your device's phone.
4. Speaker plays ringtones and alarms, and serves as the speaker for the speakerphone feature.

Note:

The Treo 700 _P smart device speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your device away from credit cards or other items that could become demagnetized.

Your Device's Features: Top View

1. Stylus 23. Expansion Card Slot

2. Ringer Switch controls the ringer setting. See "Setting System Sounds" on page 284 for details on changing the settings. Silencing the ringer turns off all system sounds, including alarms.

3. Infrared (IR) Port uses infrared technology to transmit information to and receive information from other infrared-enabled devices that use compatible software.
4. Antenna receives and sends wireless communication signals. The antenna does not telescope out of your device.
5. Expansion Card Slot allows you to expand the capabilities of your device using a MultiMediaCard, SD, or SDIO card. See “Using Expansion Cards” on page 276.
6. Stylus allows you to tap options on your device's screen. To use the stylus, slide it out of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil.

10 Section 1A: Device Setup

Inserting the Battery

WARNING:

Use only Sprint-approved or manufacturer-approved batteries and chargers with your device. The failure to use a Sprint-approved or manufacturer-approved battery and charger may increase the risk that your device will overheat, catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.

1. Use one hand to press the Battery Door Release button, and use your other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your device.

1. Align the battery contacts with the battery compartment contacts.

Section 1A: Device Setup 11

1. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then press it into place.
2. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks into place.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device.

Tip:	Buy an extra battery as a spare for long trips or heavy data use. Visit www.palm.com to purchase batteries that are approved by Sprint and that are compatible with your device.

Charging the Battery

The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and activate your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your device for three and a half hours to give it a full charge. See “Maximizing Battery Life” on page 16 for tips on maximizing the life of your device’s battery.

1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Connect the charger cable to the charger jack on the bottom of the device. Make sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward your Treo device screen.
3. To confirm that your device is charging, check the indicator light.

Red indicates that your device is charging.

Green indicates that your device is fully charged.

Section 1A: Device Setup 13

If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to turn on while the battery is charging.

The onscreen battery icon displays the power status:

Full battery icon 📄: Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.
- Partial battery icon ⚙: Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and has some power but is not fully charged.
- Almost-empty battery icon with red at the bottom 📁: Battery needs to be charged immediately.

Note:

Your device’s indicator light blinks red when the battery needs to be charged.

• Red lightning bolt 📄: Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging.
• Green lightning bolt: Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.

Tip:	To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.

Using a Sprint Charger Adapter

If the connector on your Sprint-approved 1 Amp AC charger or vehicle charger doesn't fit into the connector on the bottom of your device, use the included Sprint charger adapter.

Warning:

Use only with 1 Amp AC chargers distributed by Sprint for your device. Using any unapproved AC charger may destroy the AC charger and cause a fire.

1. Plug the AC charger into a power source.
2. Connect the Sprint charger adapter to the charger jack on bottom of the Treo 700 _P smart device.
3. Connect the charger cable to the Sprint charger adapter.
4. Charge your Treo 700p smart device as described earlier.

Battery Life

Battery life depends on individual use. Consumption factors include signal strength, speakerphone use, and use of wireless features.

If the battery drains to the point where your device doesn't turn on, the device stores your information safely until you recharge the battery. To avoid draining the battery, we recommend that you charge and synchronize your device every day, especially if you use the wireless features of your phone often.

Note:

Using your device's phone has an effect on the battery life. You can extend the battery life by turning off your device's phone while using the organizer features. In any case, regular charging is recommended for optimal performance.

Maximizing Battery Life

You can increase the life of your Treo 700 _P smart device battery by following a few easy guidelines. Remember that battery life depends on how you use your device.

• Charge your device whenever you're at your desk, or charge it overnight each day. The Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently, versus charging it after it is fully drained.
• Your device's wireless features (phone, email, messaging, Web, and any applications that use a Sprint Power Vision ^SM connection, such as Sprint TV) and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and games) consume more power than its organizer features. If you spend a lot of time using the wireless and media features, keep an eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary.
• If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your device for awhile, turn off your phone (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).

16 Section 1A: Device Setup

You can forward calls to a different number or let all calls be picked up by voicemail (see “Call Forwarding” on page 73).

• As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your device searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage, you may want to temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off, you can continue to use your device's nonwireless features.
• Turn down the screen brightness (see “Adjusting the Brightness” on page 286).
• Decrease the settings in Power Preferences and turn off Beam Receive (see "Optimizing Power Settings" on page 296).
• Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you are not using it (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device” on page 84).

18 Section 1A: Device Setup

Setting Up Service

In This Section

Making Your First Call
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords

Setting up service on your new Treo™ 700p smart device is quick and easy. This section walks you through the necessary steps to unlock your device, set up your voicemail, establish passwords, and contact Sprint for assistance with your Sprint PCS® Service.

Making Your First Call

Determining If Your Device's Phone Is Already Activated

If you received your device in the mail or purchased it at a Sprint Store, it probably has already been activated. All you need to do is unlock it.

If your phone is not activated, please call Sprint at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).

Unlocking Your Device

1. If the screen is off, press and release Power/End to wake up the screen.
2. Press Center 📋 on the 5-way navigator 🔒 to turn off Keyguard (see "Moving Around the Device Screen" on page 40 for information on the 5-way 🔒)
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. (For security purposes, the code is not visible as you type.)

Note:

If you can't recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your Social Security number or wireless phone number, or try 0000. If none of these works, call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727). See “Where to Learn More” on page 350 for other ways to get help from Sprint if you are having trouble with your service.

Making a Call

1. Press Phone .
2. Press Center 📋 on the 5-way navigator 📋 to turn off Keyguard (see “Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)” on page 297 for information on Keyguard).
3. Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you want to call.
4. Press Talk to dial.
5. After you finish the call, press Power/End to end the call.

Adjusting Call Volume

While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the call volume.

• To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.
• To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.

What's My Phone Number?

1. Make sure your phone is on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55 for information).
2. Press Phone
3. Open the menus ☐.
4. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.

Look Here for Your Phone Number

22 Section 1B: Setting Up Service

Setting Up Your Voicemail

All unanswered calls to your device's phone are automatically transferred to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off.

To set up your voicemail:

1. Press Phone

▶ Press and hold 1.

1. Follow the system prompts to:

■ Create your password.
- Record your name announcement.
- Record your greeting.

- Choose whether or not to activate Skip Pass Code (a feature that lets you access your voicemail simply by pressing and holding 1, bypassing the need for you to enter your password). If you do not activate Skip Pass Code, your device uses the Voicemail Pass Code feature, which requires you to enter your password each time you want to access your voicemail.

Note:

If you are concerned about unauthorized access to your voicemail account, we recommend that you use the Voicemail Pass Code.

For more information about using your voicemail, see “Using Voicemail” on page 64.

Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords

As a Sprint PCS customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal account information, your voicemail account, and your Sprint PCS Vision® or Sprint Power Vision™ account. To ensure that no one else has access to your information, you will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.

Account Password

If you are the account owner, you'll have an account password to sign on to www.sprint.com and to use when calling Sprint Customer Service. Your default account password is the last four digits of your Social Security number. If you are not the account owner (if someone else pays for your Sprint PCS Service), you can get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.

Voicemail Password

You'll create your voicemail password when you set up your voicemail. See "Setting Up Your Voicemail" on page 23.

Sprint PCS Vision or Sprint Power Vision Password

With your Treo 700 _P smart device, you may elect to set up a Sprint PCS Vision or Sprint Power Vision password. This optional password can be used to authorize the purchase of Premium Services content and to protect personal information on multi-phone accounts.

For more information or to change your passwords, sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).

Section 1C

Connecting to Your Computer

In This Section

Why Connect My Device to My Computer?
♦ Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device
- Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software
Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer
♦ Synchronizing Information—The Basics

Why Connect My Device to My Computer?

You can enter or change information on your device or on your computer (using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows), and then synchronize to automatically update the information in both places, so there's no need to enter it twice. We strongly recommend that you synchronize your device and your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

Before you can synchronize, you need to install the desktop synchronization software on your computer and connect the sync cable to your computer.

System Requirements

Windows computers

● Windows 2000 or XP (or later)
- 32MB of available memory (RAM)
- 170MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
• Available USB port

Mac computers

• Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
•128MB of total memory (RAM)
- 190MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
• Available USB port

26 Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer

Upgrading From Another Palm OS ^® Device

Note:

If you are setting up your first Palm OS ^® device, skip ahead to “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32.

You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous Palm OS ^® device to your new Treo ^™ 700 _P smart device. This includes your calendar events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any compatible third-party applications and files.

When you install Palm Desktop software, some third-party applications may be quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on your new Treo device. Quarantined files are not installed on your device, nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer:

C:\Program Files\Palm\\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps. (On some systems, Palm may be replaced with palmOne.)

Note:

Some third-party utilities allow you to back up your old device's information onto an expansion card and then transfer the information to your Treo device. We do not recommend this method because any incompatible applications are also transferred.

1. Calculate how much space your applications and information occupy on your previous Palm OS device:

■ From Applications view, open the menus 📄.
- Select Info on the App menu.
- At the bottom of the screen, select Size.

Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer 27

- Look at the numbers on the Free Space line and subtract the number on the left from the number on the right to calculate the space used. For example, on the device shown here, 22.4 - 17.5 = 4.9. This means that 4.9MB of space is occupied on this device.

1. If the space occupied on your old device is 60MB or less, go to step 3. If the space occupied is greater

than 60MB, then do any of the following to free up some space before you go to the next step:

- Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.

- Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion card.

- Move third-party applications to an expansion card.

- Purge old information in applications such as Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your old device for instructions on these items.

1. Synchronize your old device with your old desktop software to back up your information one last time.

2. Connect your new smart device to your computer (see “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32).

3. Install the new desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD (see “Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software” on page 30).

Important:

Do not synchronize your new Treo 700p smart device with any previous versions of Palm Desktop software.

28 Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer

1. During the installation process, synchronize your new Treo device with your new desktop synchronization software as instructed. When prompted, do the following:

2. Connect your new device to your computer (see “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32).

3. Indicate whether you want to sync all applications or only PIM (personal information management) applications.

4. Select a device name for your new device; be sure to select the same name that you used for your old device. (This is the name that appears in the User list in Palm Desktop software.)

5. (Mac users only) If you have pictures on your old device, copy them from your old device to an expansion card or beam them to your new Treo device.

6. If you plan to continue using your old device, perform a hard reset to remove its associated device name. (See the documentation that came with your old device for instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The next time you synchronize your old device with your computer, be sure to assign it a new name.

If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not manually install any of the quarantined files. Contact the third-party developer for software updates and information about compatibility with your new device.

Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software

Even if you already own a Palm OS device and have installed a previous version of the desktop software, you must install the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that comes with your Treo 700 _P smart device.

Note:

If you are installing the software on a computer at work, make sure your company allows you to install new software. Contact your company's IT department for help.

1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those that are minimized. Your computer must have all its resources available to install the software.
2. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.

Line drawing of a hand pressing down on a CD into a tray (no text or symbols)

30 Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer

1. If you are installing the software on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the desktop, and then double-click the PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions. Please note these important points about the installation process:

- You can choose which desktop software you want to use for synchronization: Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook (Windows only).

Note:

If you use Microsoft Outlook as your desktop email application, select Microsoft Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. If you select Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop software is still installed on your computer. When you enter information on your computer, be sure to enter your information in Microsoft Outlook, not in Palm Desktop software.

- When the install process prompts you to connect your device to your computer, go to “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32.

Tip:

If you want to sync information with applications other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft Outlook, you need to purchase additional third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a conduit.

Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer

1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub on your computer.
3. With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of your device. Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so.
4. Connect the charger cable to the connector on the sync cable.

You are now ready to synchronize. Go to “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33.

32 Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer

Synchronizing Information—The Basics

Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place (your device or your computer) is automatically updated in the other, so there's no need to enter the information twice. We strongly recommend that you synchronize your Treo device with your computer or corporate server frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

Important:

To sync your information, you must install the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700p smart device—even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party application. See “Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software” on page 30 for instructions.

Information from all the following applications is updated by default each time you synchronize your device with your desktop software:

Tip: You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on your device with email on your computer. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for information.

How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop software you are using, as follows:

Computer Desktop What Syncs and Where
Windows Outlook		●Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks sync with Outlook.●Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop software.
Windows Palm Desktop software All applications sync with Palm Desktop.
Mac Palm Desktop software All applications sync with Palm Desktop.

Tip: For information on locating your pictures and videos on your computer, see “Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer” on page 202.

1. Connect your Treo 700p smart device to your computer as described in "Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer" on page 32.

Note: If you're performing initial setup, your device should already be connected to your computer.

1. Press the sync button on the sync cable.

A message indicates that synchronization is in progress.

1. Wait for a message that indicates that the process is complete before you disconnect the sync cable.

Tip:

If you have any problems synchronizing, see "Synchronization" on page 321 for troubleshooting suggestions.

If you're finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus software from the Palm Software Installation CD. If you choose to install some of the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the software on your device. To install bonus software later, see “Installing Bonus Software From the CD” on page 255.

Note:

For more synchronization options, including customizing which applications sync, see “Synchronizing Information—Advanced” on page 268.

Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer 35

36 Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer

Your Treo™ 700p Smart Device

Sprint

Section 2A

Moving Around on Your Smart Device

In This Section

• Moving Around the Device Screen
  Using the Keyboard
• Opening Applications

Moving Around the Device Screen

To move around the Treo™ 700p smart device screen, you can use the

5-way navigator for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select menu items.

Note:

Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and you must use the stylus instead. In this guide, arrow icons are used to indicate directions on the 5-way navigator. These arrows are different from any onscreen scroll arrows or pick list arrows.

The 5-way 🔊 includes Right ▶, Left ◀, Up ▲, Down ▼, and Center 🔔 buttons.

40 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

Scrolling Through Screens

As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo device to move from field to field or page to page, or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list.

The behavior of the 5-way 📋 for list screens and entry screens varies by application. Here are some general scrolling tips that apply to most applications:

• Press Right ▶, Left ◀, Up ▲, and Down ▼ on the 5-way 🔒 to move to the next field, button, or action in that direction.
  In list screens, press and hold Up ▲ or Down ▼ to scroll one screen at a time.

- Press Option 🔒 and Up ▲ or Down ▼ to scroll to the next page of information within the current record (see “Using the Keyboard” on page 45).

- When inside a text field, press Right ▶ or Left ▶ to scroll to the next character or word, and press Up ▲ or Down ▼ to scroll between lines.

You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar.

Highlighting and Selecting Items

On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action.

Use the 5-way 🔒 to move the highlight from one item to another before opening or selecting it.

Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device 41

The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted:

- Border glow: When an onscreen button (OK, Cancel, etc.) or pick list is highlighted, the button acquires a glow around its border.

Colored background: When a phone number, text, an email address, or a Web link is highlighted, the item appears as white text against a colored background.

After highlighting an item, you can select or activate it by pressing Center 📄 or by tapping the item with the stylus.

Highlighting Text

You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.

• Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.
  • To highlight a word, double-tap it.
  • To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.

Accessing Command Buttons

In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to them. The 5-way 📋 controls vary according to the application, but here are some general rules that apply to most applications:

• From a list screen, such as the Contacts list or Memos list, press Right ▶ or Down to jump to the first button.
• From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Edit Contacts, press Center 📋 to jump to the first button.

42 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

- From a dialog box, such as Edit Categories, press Up ▲, Down ▼, Right ▶ or Left to scroll to the buttons.

Selecting Menu Items

Many applications have menus to provide access to additional features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they appear when you open the menus. To get the most out of your Treo device, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the various application menus.

1. Press Menu ☑ to open an application's menus.
2. Press Right ▶ and Left ◀ to switch between menus.
3. Press Up ▲ and Down ▼ to highlight a menu item.
4. Press Center 🔒 to select the menu item, or press Menu 🔒 to close the menus and cancel your selection.

Tip:

Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut, press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don't have to see the menu item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you're in Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a new event.

Selecting Options in a Pick List

A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the application menus previously described. The application menus give you access to additional features, and pick lists enable you to select the contents for a particular field.

You can select an option from a pick list with the 5-way 📋 or the stylus:

- Use the 5-way 🔒 to highlight the pick list, and then press Center 🔒 to display the items in the list. Press Up ▲ and Down ▼ to highlight the item you want, and then press Center 🔒 to select the highlighted item. To exit the pick list without making a selection, press Left ◀ or Right ▶.

- Use your stylus to tap the pick list, and then tap the item you want from the list. To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list.

44 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

Using the Keyboard

When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the Treo device with two hands and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.

The Backspace, Return, Space, and Shift keys, as well as the letter keys, work in the same way as do those found on any computer keyboard. In addition, your device offers several special function keys.

Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device 45

Key Function
Option	When pressed in conjunction with a second key, gives that key an alternate function. For example:• Option +enters the symbol or number displayed at the top of the key.• Option +opens a secondary application (see “Using the Quick Buttons” on page 50).• Option + Shift/Find opens the Find feature (see “Using Find” on page 254).• Option + Menu dims the device screen.
Alt	When pressed in conjunction with a second key, displays a variety of alternate characters that can be entered using that key. See “Entering Other Symbols and Accented Characters” on page 48 for details.
Menu	Opens application menus. See “Selecting Menu Items” on page 43 for details.

Tip:

The Treo device includes a keyboard backlight that turns on and off when the screen turns on or off. Press Option + P to adjust screen and keyboard backlight brightness. The backlight also dims when an active call lasts longer than a specified period of time. See “Optimizing Power Settings” on page 296 to adjust the automatic shut-off and dimming intervals.

46 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

Entering Lowercase and Uppercase Letters

• To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.
- To enter an uppercase letter, press Shift/Find ⚠️, and then press a letter key. You don’t need to press and hold Shift/Find ⚠️ while entering uppercase letters. When Shift is active, an up arrow ⚠️ appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.
- To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find twice. To turn it off, press Shift/Find once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

Entering Numbers, Punctuation, and Symbols

Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. To enter these characters, do one of the following:

• Press Option Ⓞ, and then press the key with the desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and hold Option Ⓡ while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol
• appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

- To turn Option Lock on, press Option twice. To turn it off, press Option once. When Option Lock is on, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

Tip:

Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as the Dial Pad view of the Phone application, or the Calculator. In this case, you do not need to press Option to enter numbers.

Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device 47

Entering Other Symbols and Accented Characters

Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are sometimes called alternate characters because you use the Alt key to enter them.

1. Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character you want. (See the table on the next page.)
2. Press Alt
3. Press Up ▲, Down ▼, Right ▶, or Left ◀ to highlight the desired character.
4. Press Center 📋 to insert the character.

Tip:

To see a list of additional alternate characters, position the cursor at the beginning of the line or after a space, and then press Alt. The alternate characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example, the alternate characters available for the e key are é, è, ë, and ê.

Symbols and Accented Characters

Enter ...	Then press to select ...
a	á à ä â ã ̂æ
A	Ä Ä Ä Ä Ä ÄÆ
b or B	ß
c	ç ç ©
C	Ç ç ©
e	è é ë ê
E	È É ë Ê
i	ì í î î
l	ì í î î
l or L	£
n	ñ
N	Ñ
o	ò ó ò ô œ õ
O	Ò Ó Õ Õ Æ Õ
p or P	¶
r or R	®
s	ß š ̄

Enter ...	Then press to select ...
S	ß S 8
t or T	TM
u	ú ù ü û
U	Û Ú Ù û
x or X	× ☒
y	ý ÿ
Y	Ÿ ÿ
0123456789.,‘“@+ -* / # (or)	; _ • \% =° ÷ € ¥ Ⓕ [ ] { } < > « » © ® TM ∧ ∅ | ☒
!	i
?	¿
:	; :- ) :-( ;-)
$	€ f ¥ ₺

Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device 49

Opening Applications

When you open an application using either a quick button or Applications view, you automatically close the application you were previously using.

Using the Quick Buttons

The front of the Treo 700 _P smart device has three buttons that you can use to open applications. The fourth button opens Applications view, which allows you to open all the applications on your device (see “Using Applications View” on page 52).

Each of the three application quick buttons can be used to open two applications. To access a button's primary application—as indicated by the graphic on the button—simply press the button. To access a button's secondary application, press Option 🔒, and then press the quick button.

Note:

Pressing any of the quick buttons or the Applications button automatically wakes up your device screen. See "Waking Up the Screen" on page 54.

50 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

Button Primary Application Secondary Application
[10WC]	Phone	[3840] [3711] W e b
[57KT]	Calendar	[4CSA] [9W28] M e m o s
[TEX3]	Messaging	[TDAX] E m a i l

Pressing Option + Applications dims your device screen.

Note:

The Messaging button opens Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM if you have downloaded and installed this application on your device. See “Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM ” on page 142 for information on using this application. You can also customize the buttons yourself. See “Customizing Device Buttons” on page 292 for details.

Using Applications View

You can access all available applications through Applications view.

1. Press Applications .
2. Use the 5-way navigator 📋 to highlight the application you want to open.
3. Press Center 📋 to open the selected application.

In Applications view, you can also do any of the following:

• Press Applications 📊 repeatedly to cycle through various categories of applications. See “Changing the Applications Settings” on page 290 for more information on categories.
• Enter the first few letters of the application's name to highlight it. For example, if you enter "p," it highlights Phone; if you then enter "r," it highlights Prefs. If you pause and then enter "r," it highlights the first application that starts with "r."

52 Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device

Using Your Device's Phone Features

In This Section

Turning Your Device On and Off
- Opening the Phone Application
Making Calls
Receiving Calls
Using Voicemail
◆ Managing Active Calls
Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command
♦ Defining Favorite Buttons
Using a Phone Headset
- Customizing Phone Settings
◆ Controlling Your Roaming Experience
- Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 53

Turning Your Device On and Off

Note:

Throughout this guide the term device is used to describe your Treo smart device and its physical aspects. The term phone is used to describe the feature of your smart device that enables you to connect to the Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network.

You can turn on your device screen and your phone independently. For example, the device screen can be off while the phone is on, or the device screen can be on while the phone is off. You can also have both the device screen and the phone turned on or off at the same time.

Waking Up the Screen

When your device screen is off, you need to wake up the screen.

1. Press and release Power/End to wake up the screen.

1. Press Center 📋 to turn off Keyguard. For more information about turning Keyguard on and off, see "Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)" on page 297.
2. Press and release Power/End to turn off the screen.

54 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Note:

You can also press any of the application quick buttons on the front of your device to wake up the screen and to go directly to the application associated with that button.

Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off

When your phone is on, it is connected to the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network (provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive phone calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and the Web browser. During initial setup, your phone is on by default, so you can use wireless services right away.

If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as Contacts and Calendar, as well as the media features such as the Pocket Tunes™ music application and Pics&Videos. This is sometimes referred to as flight mode and is ideal for using your device on airplanes and for maximizing battery life.

1. Wake up the screen.
2. Press and hold Power/End 📋. (You will hear a series of ascending tones and see a "Welcome" screen. When your device locates a signal, "Sprint" and the signal-strength icon 📁 appear at the top of the Phone application screen, indicating that you can use the phone and Internet features, if they are supported by the local network.)
3. Press and hold Power/End 📋 again to turn off your phone. (You will hear a series of descending tones and see a “Powering off” screen. When your phone is off, “Phone Off” appears at the top of the Phone application screen. You can still use the nonwireless features of your device, such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.)

Opening the Phone Application

Press Phone Ⓤ to open the Main view of the Phone application.

56 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Making Calls

Your Treo™ 700 _P smart device offers several options for making phone calls. As you become familiar with your device, you'll discover which method you prefer.

Dialing Using the Onscreen Dial Pad

1. Press Phone

1. Enter the phone numbers by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.

2. Tap Dial, press Talk to dial.

Note:

If you changed the wallpaper in the Main view of the Phone application (see “Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application” on page 92), you can still access the Dial Pad. From the Main view of the Phone application, press Talk and then select Dial Pad.

Tip:	You can paste numbers directly intoMainview. Copy a number from another application, and then pressPhoneto switch toMainview.Open theEditmenu, and then selectPaste.PressTalkto dial.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 57

Dialing With the Keyboard

1. Press Phone
2. Press the numbered keys to enter the phone number. (You don't need to press Option 🔒.)
3. Press Talk to dial.

Dialing by Contact Name

Before you can dial a call by contact name, you must create some contacts (see "Adding a Contact" on page 220), or import them by synchronizing (see "Synchronizing Information—The Basics" on page 33).

1. Press Phone
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Using the keyboard, start entering one of the following for the contact you want to call:
   First name (JOH for John).
   Last name (SMI for Smith).
4. First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).

For example, entering SM might display Smila Anderson, John Smith, and Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only John Smith.

Characters you enter appear here

1. Select the number you want to call, and press Talk ☐ to dial.

58 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Tip:

To see more information for a contact, highlight the name and press Center on the 5-way. To restart your search, pressBackspace to delete letters you've entered, or select Cancel to return to Main view.

Dialing With a Speed-Dial Favorite Button

Your device comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See “Creating a Speed-Dial Favorite Button” on page 79.

1. Press Phone

1. Press Down ▼ to access your favorite buttons.
2. Use the 5-way 🔒 to highlight the desired speed-dial favorite button. Speed-dial favorite buttons are indicated by the icon 📋.
3. Press Center ☐ to dial the number associated with the selected button.

Tip:

To view more favorite buttons, press Rightor Down on the 5-way. If the highlighted favorite was added from Contacts, press Space to view all numbers associated with that contact.

Dialing From a Web Page or Message

Your Treo device recognizes most phone numbers that appear on Web pages or in text, email, or Sprint PCS® Picture Mail messages. If you can't use the 5-way or stylus to highlight and dial a phone number on a Web page or in a message, it means that your device doesn't recognize the number as a phone number.

1. Select the phone number on the Web page or in the message.
2. Press Center 📋 to open the Dial Number dialog box.
3. Select Dial to dial the number.

Redialing a Recently Called Number

From the Main view in the Phone application, press and hold Talk to dial the last number you called.

-or-

To select from your most recently dialed numbers, from the Main view in the Phone application, press Talk ☐ to open the Redial list, select the number you want to call, and then press Talk ☐ again to dial.

-or-

To select from a chronological list of calls, select the Call Log favorite button. You can also access the Call Log from the Main view in the Phone application by pressing Talk and selecting Call Log from the Redial list.

Receiving Calls

To receive calls, your device's phone must be on. This is different from having only the screen turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55). When your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.

Answering Calls

Press Talk

-or-

Using the 5-way 🔒, select the onscreen Answer button.

-or-

If the headset is attached, press the headset button.

Tip:

To prevent calls from accidentally being answered while the device is in a pocket or briefcase, you can disable the screen's touch-sensitive feature when an incoming call arrives (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).

Sending Calls to Voicemail

▶ Press Power/End

-or-

Using the 5-way 📋, select the onscreen Ignore button.

Using the 5-way 📋, select the onscreen Ignore with Text button. This option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to the caller.

62 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Tip:

Do not press Power/End to ignore a call waiting alert; this hangs up your active call (the call waiting alert then changes to an incoming call alert). Use the 5-way method instead.

Silencing the Ring of an Incoming Call

Press any key on your device except Talk , Power/End , or the 5-way

-or-

To immediately silence all system sounds including the ringer, slide the

Ringer switch to Sound Off ✗ (see "Silencing Sounds" on page 284).

If music is playing and a call arrives, the phone rings softly and the music automatically pauses. The music resumes if you ignore the call or, if you answer the call, the music resumes when you hang up.

Using Voicemail

Setting Up Your Voicemail

Your voicemail number is preset when you activate your device. The first time you call voicemail, you are prompted to enter your voicemail password. If necessary, please contact Sprint for your password and enter it as prompted.

1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55).
2. Press Phone
3. Select the Voicemail favorite button to dial the automated voicemail system.
4. Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.

Tip:

You can also press and hold 1 to dial voicemail from the Dial Pad and Favorites.

Voicemail Notification

When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an Alert screen. To respond to the Alert screen, select OK to dismiss the alert or select Listen to play the message. When you have messages that you have not listened to, the Voicemail icon ✉ also appears in the title bar at the top of the Main view in the Phone application.

64 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages

1. Press Phone
2. Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system, or select the Voicemail favorite button.
3. Enter your voicemail password by using the keyboard, or select Extra Digits if you defined this option (see "Defining Favorite Buttons" on page 78 for details on defining extra digits). Remember that you do not need to press Option 🔒 to enter numbers, an asterisk (*), or a pound sign (#) while on an active call.

Tip:

If the Voicemail icon appears in the title bar of the Main view of the Phone application, you can select this icon to retrieve your voicemail.

Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone

1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. Press * (Option Ⓞ + Z) when your voicemail answers.
3. Enter your password, and then press # (Option Ⓞ + B).

Displaying Numeric Pages

If an incoming call goes to voicemail, the caller can choose to enter their phone number as a numeric page instead of leaving a voicemail message. When someone pages you, the page is displayed on the Alert screen. If there is just one alert, the icon is a phone with a bubble on it. If there are multiple alerts, the icon is a messaging icon

1. From the Alert screen, highlight an item with an alert icon.
2. Select Go To to view the page in the Messaging application. The page displays the caller's phone number.

Managing Active Calls

When you make or receive a call, Active Call view appears. Use the 5-way navigator to access the onscreen buttons in this view.

The onscreen buttons in Active Call view perform the following functions:

	Ends the call immediately. You can also press the headset button (if the headset is attached).
	Turns on the speakerphone. When the speakerphone is on, you can take the device away from your ear and use other features during a call. For example, you can check your calendar or look up contact information.
	Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 67

	Replaces the Spkr-phone button when a Bluetooth® hands-free device such as a headset or car kit is attached. Select this button to transfer the call from the Bluetooth hands-free device to the built-in earpiece.
	Places the current call on hold.
	Enables you to place another call while the first call is on hold. For information on handling a second outgoing call, see “Making a Second Call” on page 71.
	Opens the Dial Pad so you can manually dial additional numbers, such as an extension or a response to a voice prompt.
	Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you assigned to a favorite button. This button replaces the Dial Pad button during outgoing calls to numbers that include predefined extra digits. See “Defining Favorite Buttons” on page 78 for information on defining extra digits.
	Mutes the microphone so that you cannot be heard.

Tip:	To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while holding the device to your ear, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).

68 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Ending a Call

Do one of the following to end a call:

• Press Power/End.
• Select Hang Up All.
• Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).

Tip:

When a call lasts longer than two minutes, the screen dims. Press any key except Power/End to wake up the screen, and then press Power/End to hang up the call. Be careful not to press Power/End to wake up the screen because this will accidentally end the call.

Switching Applications During an Active Call

You can use many other applications on your device while holding a phone conversation, including the organizer and text messaging features. You cannot, however, make a data connection while on an active call. This means that you cannot browse the Web or send and receive email or Picture Mail messages while on an active call.

1. Go to Applications
2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.
3. Complete the task in the application.
4. Press Phone 📊 to return to Active Call view.

Tip:

If you'd like to continue talking while viewing another application, select Spkr-phone before you switch to the other application. If you're using a headset, you can skip this step.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 69

Saving Phone Numbers

After you complete an outgoing call to a number that is not in your Contacts list, you are prompted to add the number to your Contacts list. You are also prompted to add new numbers from incoming calls with caller ID.

• To create a new contact entry for this number, select Create a New Contact, and enter the contact's information.
• To add this number to an existing contact entry, select Add to a Contact, and then select the contact. The number is pasted into the first available phone number field for that contact.

• To decline adding this number, select Cancel.

- To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don't ask me this again box.

Tip:

You can re-enable the Add New Number prompt if you've disabled it. In the Phone application, open the menus and select Phone Preferences. Check the Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls box.

If you don't add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later:

1. In the Call Log (see "Redialing a Recently Called Number" on page 61), highlight the number you want to save.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Add Contact.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. Select Done.

70 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call while your first call is still active.

1. Dial the first number and wait until the person answers.

2. Use the 5-way 🔒 to select Hold.

3. Use the 5-way 🔒 to select Add Call.

4. Dial the second number using any of the methods described in "Making Calls" on page 57.

5. When the Dial another call? prompt appears, select Yes.

Tip:

Active Call view now includes two status lines, each representing one of the calls. You can join the two calls in a conference call by selecting Conf. or finish the second call and return to the first call, but you cannot switch between the two calls.

1. Press Power/End 📋 to end both calls. To return to the first call, wait for the second call to hang up.

Answering a Second Call (Call Waiting)

When you are on an active call, you can receive a second call. When the second call comes in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any of the following to handle the second call:

- To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press Talk or use the 5-way navigator to select Answer.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 71

• To send the new call to voicemail, use the 5-way 📋 to select Ignore.
• To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, use the 5-way 🔒 to select Ignore with Text.
• To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/End 📄.

Tip:

Once you have answered a second call, to switch back and forth between the original call and the call you answered, use the 5-way to select Swap.

Note:

When you answer a second call and then select the Hang Up All button, it ends both calls. In this situation, if the first caller has not yet hung up the phone, the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network automatically redials your number from the first caller's number and you see an incoming call alert. You can answer to continue your call with the first caller.

Making a Conference Call Using Three-Way Calling

You can join two calls in a conference session by using three-way calling. Normal airtime rates apply for each of the two calls.

1. When your first call is active, place a second call (see “Making a Second Call” on page 71). (You cannot initiate a three-way call if the second call is an incoming call.)

2. When you're connected to the second party, use the 5-way 🔒 to select Conf to begin your three-way call.

Note:

If one of the people you called hangs up, you and the remaining caller stay connected. The screen does not change to indicate that one of the callers has hung up. If you initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected.

1. To end the three-way call, press Power/End or select Hang Up All.

Call Forwarding

You can forward calls to another number. You can still make calls from your device while call forwarding is activated. There is an additional per-call charge for this service. When call forwarding is active, an icon ➡ appears in the title bar of the Phone application's Main view.

1. Press Phone
2. Open the menus ☐.

1. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.

2. Select the Call forwarding pick list.

3. If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select the number.

4. If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list, select Edit numbers, and then select New. Enter a 10-digit forwarding number without spaces, and select OK. Then select the number from the Call forwarding pick list.

5. Select OK.

6. Call your Treo device to confirm that call forwarding is active.

Using Flash Mode During an Active Call

Flash mode provides an alternate way to manage your calls while one or more calls are active. For example, you can dial another call, swap between active calls, or join two calls in a conference session with the press of a button while in Flash mode.

1. Press Talk from Active Call view.
2. If the Do you want to switch to Flash mode? prompt appears, select Yes.
3. While in Flash mode, do any of the following:

- If you have one active call and you answer an incoming second call, press Talk swap between the calls.

74 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

If you have one active call, to make an outgoing second call, dial the number using any of the methods described in “Making Calls” on page 57.

If you have one active call and you place an outgoing second call, press Talk after establishing a connection with the second party to set up a conference session using three-way calling.

- If you have two calls in conference, press Talk 📄 to hang up one of the calls; you can then dial another number and include the new caller in the conference session.

Note:

Pressing Talk during a conference call usually hangs up the second call. However, depending on your network connection, you may occasionally hang up the first call.

1. To exit Flash mode and end all the calls, press Power/End ☐.

Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command

If you subscribe to the Sprint PCS® Voice Command service, you can call a number by just saying a name. (There is a monthly charge for this service.)

To activate Sprint PCS Voice Command, you must speak to a Sprint Customer Service representative:

1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
2. Press Phone
3. Press * (Option Ⓞ + Z), press 2, and then press Talk 📋 to contact Sprint Customer Service and sign up.

Setting Up Your Personal Address Book

To use Sprint PCS Voice Command, you must first set up your personal address book.

1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press * (Option Ⓞ + Z), and then press Talk 📋. Follow the system prompts. (You’ll hear a tone, followed by the prompt “Ready.”)
2. Say "Add Name" to begin setting up your Personal Address Book, and then follow the voice prompts.

Making a Call With Sprint PCS Voice Command

1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press * (Option Ⓞ + Z), and then press Talk 📋. (You'll hear a tone followed by the prompt "Ready.")
2. After the prompt, say "Call" and the name you've assigned to the number you want to call. (Your request will be repeated and you will be asked to verify it.)
3. Say "Yes" to dial the call. Say "No" to cancel.

Defining Favorite Buttons

Your Treo device provides 70 programmable favorite buttons for quick access to the following common tasks:

• Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
- Accessing your Call Log
- Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
- Opening an application
- Accessing a Web page
- Addressing a text, email, or Picture Mail message
- Accessing voicemail (preset on your Treo device)

Sprint may preset favorite buttons on your device that are customized for their services. You can customize all favorite buttons except Voicemail—either delete and reassign existing favorite buttons or create new ones—to perform any of the supported tasks.

For each favorite button, you can also set up a Quick Key that gives you instant access to the phone number or corresponding screen. Quick Keys are optional and can be letters only, except for the Voicemail Quick Key, which is preprogrammed as 1. The letter equivalent for that key is E, so you cannot assign E as a Quick Key to another favorite button.

Tip:	If you’re upgrading from a previous Treo device, your favorites might be transferred along with your other information. However, you may need to rearrange the order in which your favorite buttons appear by opening the Record menu and then selecting Edit Favorites Pages.

78 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Creating a Speed-Dial Favorite Button

1. Press Phone

1. Use the 5-way navigator 📋 to select a blank favorite button.

Tip:

If there are no blank favorite buttons on the current Favorites page, pressRighton the5-wayto scroll through the other pages. If you run out of blank favorite buttons, you can delete some existing favorites to make room for new ones (see “Editing or Deleting an Existing Favorite Button” on page 81).

1. Enter a label for the favorite.

If the entry is for an existing contact, select Lookup. Start entering the contact's last name, and then select the number you want for the contact when it appears in the lookup list.

- If the entry is for a new contact, enter the Label, press Down ▼, and enter the Number.

1. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter which you can press and hold from the Main, Dial Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone application to dial this speed-dial number.

2. (Optional) Select More, and then select advanced options:

3. Extra Digits lets you define additional digits to dial, such as a password or extension. To enter a one-second pause, insert a comma between digits. To add a longer pause, enter more commas.
   ■ Dial Extra Digits automatically dials predefined extra digits immediately after dialing the phone number, when checked.

4. Select OK.

Creating Other Types of Favorite Buttons

1. Press Phone

1. Use the 5-way 📋 to select a blank favorite button.
2. Select the Type pick list and select Call Log, Dial Pad, Contacts, Application, Message, Email, or Web Link.
3. Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on the screen.

Tip:

When creating a Message or Email favorite you can enter multiple addresses; simply separate each address with a comma. This is an easy way to send messages to a group of people.

1. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter which you can press and hold from the Main, Dial Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone application to open the favorite.
2. Select OK.

Editing or Deleting an Existing Favorite Button

You can edit or delete most favorite buttons. You cannot edit or delete the preset Voicemail button, but you can add extra digits or move the Voicemail button to a different position.

1. Press Phone
2. Use the 5-way 🔒 to access Favorites.
3. Highlight the favorite button you want to edit or delete.
4. Open the menus ☐.
5. Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu.
6. To edit the entry, make the desired changes. (For example, you can add a Quick Key shortcut to any favorite.) To delete the entry, select Delete.
7. Select OK.

Tip:

You can also organize your favorite buttons on different pages. Open the Record menu, and then select Edit Favorites Pages. To arrange your favorites, drag and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move a favorite to another page, drag the button onto the page icon at the bottom of the screen.

Using a Phone Headset

You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. If you need to use your device while driving and this is permitted in your area, we recommend using a phone headset (wired headset included) or a hands-free car kit (sold separately).

In addition to the stereo headset included with your Treo device, your device is compatible with the following types of headsets that are sold separately:

●Wired headsets with a 2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
● Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless technology

Note:

For a list of compatible hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html.

Check the specifications for your headset or car kit to confirm compatibility. Please note that you cannot use stereo headphones with Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to music files.

Using a Wired Headset

When using the headset that is included with your device, you can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks:

• Answer an incoming call or a call waiting call.
• Pick up a call that is on hold.
• Switch between an active call and a call on hold (if the second call is incoming).
• Join two calls in a conference (if the second call is outgoing).
• Hang up a single call.

Note:

The headset designed for Treo™ 180, 270, and 300 devices is not compatible with your Treo 700 smart device. Standard headsets sold with other Sprint phones are compatible with your device. If you hear a headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your headset may be incompatible with your device.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 83

Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device

Once you set up a partnership with a Bluetooth hands-free device such as a headset or car kit, you can communicate with that device whenever it is powered on and within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

Note:

In the documentation for the other device, a partnership might be referred to by a term such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Bluetooth 🔒, or tap the Bluetooth icon in the title bar.

2. Select On.

3. Enter a device name for your Treo device. This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth device's screen when it connects to your Treo device.

4. Prepare your hands-free device to accept a connection from another Bluetooth device. See the documentation that came with your hands-free device for instructions.

1. Select Setup Devices.
2. Select Hands-free Setup.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with the specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a passkey.

Important:

Some hands-free devices may have a built-in passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the passkey. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your Treo device and your hands-free device. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the hands-free device has a built-in passkey, see the device's documentation for the passkey.

1. After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to Applications view.

You can now use your Treo device with the Bluetooth hands-free device such as a headset or car kit.

Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device

If your Bluetooth hands-free device is turned on and within range (up to 30 feet in ideal conditions), the Treo device automatically routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the Treo device's earpiece. When a call comes in, your

device rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you answer the call on your Treo device, the call goes to the hands-free device.

The features available on your hands-free device vary by model. Check the documentation for your hands-free device for details on the supported features and how to use those features. Your Treo device can support the following features, provided that your hands-free device also supports them:

• Answer an incoming call.
• Answer a call waiting call.
• Switch between an active call and a call on hold (if the second call is incoming).
• Hang up a single call.

- Transfer an outgoing call from the Treo device's earpiece to the hands-free device.

- Ignore an incoming call.

- Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device.

- View a log of recently received, missed, and dialed calls, and dial numbers for these calls directly from the hands-free device.

Transfer speed-dial favorites and Contacts entries containing phone numbers from your Treo device to the hands-free device phone book, up to the maximum number of entries allowed in your hands-free device's phone book.

Tip:

Your Treo device transfers speed-dial favorites first, and then contacts in alphabetical order up to the maximum number of entries allowed in your hands-free device's phone book. So if you have important numbers that you want to show up in your hands-free device's phone book, be sure to create speed-dial favorites for them before you transfer the numbers.

86 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Setting Up Your Hands-Free Device to Automatically Answer Calls

You can set your Bluetooth hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls, provided that your device supports this feature.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Handsfree.
3. Select the Auto answer pick list and select whether you want your hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls, and how quickly you want it to answer.
4. Select Done.

Customizing Phone Settings

Selecting Ringtones

You can set various tones for various types of incoming phone calls.

Tip:

You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your device (see "Downloading Files From a Web Page" on page 163). You can also download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your device.

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Ring Tones.
4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.
5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want the vibrate option to turn on.
6. (Optional) Check the Escalate ring tone volume box if you want the ring to play softly and then increase to full volume the longer it rings.
7. Select ringtones from the following pick lists:

- Known Caller for an incoming call from someone in your Contacts or Favorites.

• Unknown Caller for an incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites.
• Roaming for incoming calls when you're outside the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network.

9. Select Done.

Tip:

You can also preview, delete, and send sounds on your device. Go to Applications, select Sound Preferences, and then select Manage. To play a sound, select it, and then press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound, select it, and then press Backspace. To send a sound, select it, and then select Talk.

Selecting Phone Alert Tones

You can set various tones for various types of alerts.

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.

2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.

3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Phone Alerts.

4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.

5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want the vibrate option to turn on.

1. Select options for when an alert should sound:

2. Voicemail Alert to indicate when a new voicemail message has arrived.

3. Coverage in/out to indicate if you've moved in or out of a coverage area.

4. Signal faded to indicate if the network signal lost strength or disappeared and a call was dropped.

5. Select Done.

Adjusting Call Volume

While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the call volume.

Adjusting Ringer Volume

When you are not on a call, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the ringer volume, and then press the Side button to confirm the change.

90 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Assigning a Caller ID Picture

1. Press Phone

1. Select the Contacts favorite button.
2. Open the contact entry to which you want to give a caller ID picture, and then select Edit.

3. Select the Picture box and do one of the following:

4. Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact entry when you save the picture (if your device includes a camera).

5. Select Photos and select an existing picture that you want to assign to this contact.

6. Select Done.

Assigning a Caller ID Ringtone

Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your device. This is a great way to keep track of calls from important people in your life and to screen calls you'd prefer not to answer.

1. Press Phone

1. Select the Contacts favorite button.
2. Open the contact entry to which you want to give a caller ID ringtone, and then select Edit.
3. Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone for this contact.
4. Select Done.

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 91

Tip:

You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit Categories, and then select the category. Select the ringtone on the Edit Category screen.

Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application

Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and text entry mode of the Main view in the Phone application.

1. Press Phone
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Display Options.

4. Set any of the following options:

5. Show ... sets whether the Dial Pad or wallpaper appears in the Main view of the Phone application. If you select Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and then select an image to use as wallpaper.

6. Typing ... sets whether typing enters numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a contact search.

Tip:

If you choose to have typing start a contact search, you need to press Option to enter a number when dialing from the Dial Pad.

92 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

• Show Calendar event: Sets whether the current event from the Calendar application appears in the Main view of the Phone application. When this option is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the Calendar application.
• Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether Favorites appear in the Main view of the Phone application.
• Rows: Sets the number of favorite button rows that appear in the Main view of the Phone application.

5. Select OK.

Setting Your Dialing Preferences

Dialing preferences let you add a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers you enter from Contacts. You can also add a different prefix based on the length of the phone number.

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.

2. Select Options, and then select Dial Preferences.

3. Set any one or more of the following options:

■Dialing from North America: Formats phone numbers using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).

- Always dial 1 in front of the area code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone numbers you dial from Contacts (see “Dialing by Contact Name” on page 58). A 1 is not automatically entered if you dial using the keyboard or the Dial Pad. This option is available only when Dialing from North America is enabled.

- International Prefix: Adds the specified prefix in front of international phone numbers; in the U.S. and Canada, this prefix is 011. When you dial, the plus symbol (+) preceding the phone number is replaced by this prefix.

- To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to 7-digit numbers. For example, enter your own area code to automatically add your area when you dial local numbers.

- To 6/5/4 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to numbers with the specified number of digits. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office begin with 555, followed by a 4-digit extension, you can select 4 and enter 555 as the prefix. When you want to call a colleague, simply enter the colleague's 4-digit extension. Your device automatically dials 555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can also create contact entries with just the extension number and then dial the number from your Contacts list.

1. Select OK.

Setting Phone Preferences

1. Press Phone
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.
4. Select any one or more of the following preferences:

- Location ON allows the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network to determine your longitude and latitude position at any time in order to provide location-specific services. 911 Only restricts your location information to emergency services only.

Note:

Your device is equipped with a location feature for use in connection with location-based services that may be available in the future. Currently the location information is used to help identify your longitude and latitude position during an emergency call in areas where E-911 service is available. For your safety, your location information will always be provided during a 911 emergency call regardless of whether you select this setting.

- Short DTMF Tones lets you choose to send DTMF tones (a certain type of touch-tone dialing tone) stored as Extra Digits as rapid tones (see "Defining Favorite Buttons" on page 78 for information on defining extra digits).

Note:

Some older answering machine systems may not recognize short tones.

• Clear Voicemail Icon lets you manually reset the Voicemail icon if it continues to appear in the Phone application title bar even after you have listened to all your voicemail.
• TTY/TDD enables you to use your device's phone if you are hearing impaired. Select Default Mode to send and receive text. Select VCO Mode (Voice Carry Over) to send voice and receive text. Select HCO Mode (Hearing Carry Over) to send text and receive voice. See the following section, "TTY Use With Sprint PCS Service," for more information.
• Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls displays a prompt asking whether you would like to add the unknown phone number to your Contacts list when you complete a call.

5. Select OK.

TTY Use With Sprint PCS Service

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone.

Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine, headset, or hands-free kit to your device through the headset jack while this mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission.

When establishing your Sprint PCS Service, please call Sprint Customer Service via the state Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first pressing 711, and then pressing Talk. Then provide the state TRS with this number: 866-727-4889.

WARNING 911 Emergency Calling

Sprint recommends that TTY users make emergency calls by other means, including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and landline communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when received by public safety answering points (PSAPs), rendering some communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY equipment or software used by PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry and PSAP community are currently working to resolve this.

Controlling Your Roaming Experience

Your device is digital dual-band, which means you can make and receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network and you can also roam on other digital networks where Sprint has implemented roaming agreements with other carriers.

When you roam outside the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network, the Roaming icon R appears at the top of the screen. Additional charges may apply if you use your Treo 700 P smart device while roaming.

To learn more about roaming, visit www.sprint.com.

Feature Availability

• You can make and receive calls while roaming.
• You can access voicemail while roaming.
• Other features that are standard on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network, such as call waiting, Sprint PCS Voice Command, and Sprint PCS Vision or Sprint Power Vision, may be available depending upon your roaming network.

Setting Roaming Preferences

Use Roaming Preferences to set specific options for using your phone while roaming. For example, you can set options to be notified that you are roaming before placing a call or making a data connection, so that you are aware that you might incur extra charges.

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.

98 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

1. Select Options, and then select Roaming Preferences.

2. Select the Network Selection pick list and select the networks with which you want to allow your phone to make a connection:

3. Allow roaming enables your phone to determine the best network—either home or roaming—with which to connect.
   ■ Home networks only allows your phone to connect only to your home networks.
   ■ Roaming networks only allows your phone to connect to roaming networks only.

4. Check the boxes to enable either or both of the following roaming warning options:

■ Before outgoing calls causes an alert to appear, warning you that you are on a roaming network when you attempt to dial an outgoing call.
■ Before data connections causes an alert to appear, warning you that you are on a roaming network when you attempt to make a data connection, for example, to browse the Web.

1. Select OK.

Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status

You can monitor the status of your device's signal strength and several other items, using icons in the title bar of the Phone application.

Sprint	Your phone is on and you're inside the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network. If you are outside a coverage area, No Service or Roaming appears instead.No Service means that there is no coverage at all and Roaming means that another wireless service provider's network is available. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.
	Your phone is on and is connected to the Sprint PCS Vision® (1xRTT) data network. When the arrows are green, data is being transferred (for example, when you are opening a Web page) and you cannot receive calls. When the arrows are gray, you are connected to the network but data is not currently being transferred (for example, when you are viewing a Web page that is completely open), and you can receive calls.
or	Your phone is on and is connected to the high-speed Sprint Power Vision data network. When the triangles are blue, data is being transferred (for example, when you are opening a Web page); when the triangles are gray, you are connected to the network but data is not currently being transferred (for example, when you are viewing a Web page that is completely open). In either state, you can receive incoming calls.
	Your phone is on and you are within range of a Sprint PCS Vision or high-speed Sprint Power Vision data network, but you do not have an active data connection. You can receive incoming calls.
	The Location ON option has been selected. The icon appears with a red slash when the 911 only option has been selected. See “Setting Phone Preferences” on page 95 for information.
[seea]	Appears when call forwarding is active.
###	TTY/TDD mode is active. Use this mode to communicate by telephone if you are deaf or hard of hearing or if you have speech or language disabilities.
###	You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.
	You have a new alert, such as a Calendar alarm or a new text message. To view the alert, press and hold Center or select the icon. See “Viewing and Using the Alert Screen” on page 103 for more information.
###	Roaming is active.
	Bluetooth® wireless technology is off. The icon appears in blue when Bluetooth wireless technology is on and appears in reverse blue when your device is communicating with other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. To quickly access the Bluetooth Preferences screen, tap the Bluetooth icon.
###	Your device is connected to a headset that is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon; it appears in light blue when you are not on an active call and in dark blue when you are on an active call.
	Replaces the Bluetooth icon when a dial-up networking connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is active.
###	Your battery is partially drained. When the battery drains to 20% of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its capacity, you begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its capacity, the device beeps (if the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position) and the icon changes from red to clear.
	Your battery is charging. The lightning bolt turns from red to green when the battery is fully charged and your device remains connected to the AC charger.
	Your battery is fully charged, and your device is not connected to the charger.
	You have new text or Picture Mail messages. The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. Select this icon to view your messages.
	You have new email messages. The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox; if you have set up multiple email accounts on your device, the number reflects the account that was most recently accessed. Select this icon to view your messages.
	Displays the current (or next) event from the Calendar application. If you have an event conflict during the current time period, a red bar appears next to the event description. To jump to the current event in the Calendar application, select the Calendar status line (see “Displaying Your Calendar” on page 224 for details).

Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features 101

Tip:	To display the remaining battery power, tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.

102 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Viewing and Using the Alert Screen

The Alert screen on your device shows information about incoming items such as new email messages and Calendar events. The Alert screen also notifies you if you miss a phone call.

To view the Alert screen, select the blinking bell when it appears in the upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold Center when the blinking bell appears.

Note:

Your device's indicator light blinks green when you have a new alert. This way, you can be aware of new alerts even if the screen is off.

You can do any of the following:

• Check the box to clear an alert from the list.
• Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view the alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on).
• Select Done to close the Alert screen and return to whatever you were doing on your device before you opened the Alert screen. The bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- Select Snooze to temporarily close the Alert screen and return to whatever you were doing on your device before you opened the Alert screen. The screen reappears every five minutes until you select one of the other options.

- Select Clear All to delete all alerts on the Alert screen.

104 Section 2B: Using Your Device's Phone Features

Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other Wireless Connections

Sprint

Section 3A

Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics

In This Section

◆ Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision
♦ Sprint Power Vision Features
- Accessing Sprint PCS Vision

Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision

Sprint PCS Vision provides wireless access to the Internet anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network. To sign up for Sprint PCS Vision services or to access complete instructions, visit www.sprint.com. For information on charges associated with features that use a Sprint PCS Vision connection, refer to your Sprint PCS Service Plan.

Enabling Sprint PCS Vision

1. Make sure your device's phone is turned on, as described in "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55.
2. Press Option 📋, and then press Phone 🔒.
3. When the Connect to the Internet dialog box appears, select Yes to open your device's Web browser and make a Sprint PCS Vision connection.

- If you have not already done so, select Now when the Preparing Vision Services dialog box appears. This initiates a one-time process to configure your Sprint PCS Vision services. At the end of this two-minute process, your device connects to the Sprint PCS Vision home page. - If you want to cancel the connection, select No.

Tip:

To bypass the Connect to the Internet dialog box in the future, check the Don't ask me again box.

1. Use the 5-way 🔒 to scroll around and select from a variety of online services.
2. Go to Applications 📄 to exit the browser and end your session.

108 Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics

Sprint Power Vision Features

With Sprint PCS Vision services, you have access to additional features, better performance, faster Web connections, and a wider variety of online services. Features such as Web access, graphically enriched games, and sending/receiving digital images are available on your Treo™ 700 smart device through the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network.

	Sprint PCS® Picture MailInstantly shoot, share, and print sharp, high-resolution digital pictures, and take and send short video clips with your device.(Camera devices only.)
	MessagingSend and receive email, text, and multimedia messages, or chat.
	SprintTVSM Watch live Mobile Digital TV (MDTV) on the go with full-motion video and vivid sound.
	GamesPlay exciting games with full-color graphics, sound, and vibration.
	RingersPersonalize your Treo 700 P smart device by downloading ringtones.You can use Sound preferences to assign these tones to different applications and to assign a tone to a specific contact.
	Screen SaversDownload unique images to use as wallpaper, or make it easy to tell who’s calling by assigning specific images to entries in your contacts list.
	WebExperience full-color graphic versions of popular Web sites.
	On DemandSet and then receive customized, up-to-date information on sports, weather, news, money, and more, on demand—the way you want it.
	Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSMObtain secure, real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes company email, calendar, business directory, and personal contacts.

Accessing Sprint PCS Vision

Once your device is activated, you are signed in and ready to connect to Sprint PCS Vision services at any time.

Sprint PCS Vision User Name

Your Sprint PCS Vision User Name is automatically assigned to you. Your user name, which resembles an email address (for example, [e-mail]), is used with Sprint PCS Mail and Messaging services. Remember, with Sprint PCS Business Connection, you can use virtually any email address (see “Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM ” on page 142). Your Sprint PCS Vision User Name is simply an additional address that identifies your Sprint PCS Account. When your device is enabled with Sprint PCS Vision services, your user name automatically appears on the Phone Info screen.

To find your user name:

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.

Sprint PCS Vision Symbols on Your Screen

When you are connected to Sprint PCS Vision services, a data connection icon appears at the top of the Main view in the Phone application. See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100 for a description of the various data connection icons.

Sprint PCS Vision Billing Information

See your service plan for details on Sprint PCS Vision billing.

Sprint Power Vision ^SM

In This Section

◆ Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision
Personalizing Your Service With On Demand
Using Your Device's Phone as a Modem

Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision

Sprint Power Vision combines unmatched visual and sound clarity with broadband-like speeds on your wireless phone. Utilizing the fastest commercially available wireless network technology (1xEV-DO) and leveraging continued investment in handset and application development, Sprint Power Vision offers the ultimate in wireless entertainment, real imaging solutions, instant communication, and personalized information at broadband-like speeds. Your Treo 700 P smart device is equipped with the latest in multimedia, imaging, and processing technology, and offers exclusive services, such as On Demand.

Note:

The Treo 700 _P smart device's data services work anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network. These services perform at enhanced speeds with improved quality in areas with high-speed data coverage. Go to www.sprint.com or see our coverage map for details and more information.

Enabling Sprint Power Vision

Since Sprint Power Vision is an enhancement to your device's Sprint PCS Vision® capabilities, you don't need to take any extra action to make Sprint Power Vision available. As long as your device's Sprint PCS Vision setting is enabled (see “Enabling Sprint PCS Vision” on page 108), your device is ready to access Sprint Power Vision services where available.

When your device has a Sprint Power Vision connection, a Power Vision status icon (Tor) is displayed at the top of the screen. (For details, see “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100.)

114 Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision

Personalizing Your Service With On Demand

With Sprint Power Vision's exclusive On Demand feature, you can personalize your device's data services to suit your needs. The On Demand feature makes it easier than ever to retrieve the most popular Web information and categories instantly. On Demand uses the ZIP code you provide to customize the content you receive, so you can get the information you want, when you want it.

On Demand acts like a computer browser's customized home page, displaying a variety of top categories such as News, Sports, Weather, Money, Movies, and more. This information is updated throughout the day, so you'll always be up-to-date. In addition to presenting a number of fixed categories, On Demand also offers optional categories (for an additional monthly charge) that allow faster access to even more information.

Initializing Your On Demand Service

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select On Demand 🔒.
2. Enter your preferred ZIP code and select Next. (The On Demand service will customize itself to your selected location, and the On Demand menu screen will be displayed.)

Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision 115

Accessing On Demand Information

Finding the information you're looking for with On Demand is as easy as navigating a Web browser on your computer. (The following examples illustrate how to access News and Movies information.)

To Access News Information Using On Demand:

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select On Demand ⚙. (The On Demand menu screen will be displayed.)

2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight News (the button name changes to Late Breaking News & Photos), and then press Center 📄.

3. Depending on which category you select, you will see a menu with additional options (for this example, you would be able to select from such

subcategories as "Top Stories," "US News," "World News," and "Politics").

1. Select a subcategory, and then select an article you would like to view. (The article will be displayed.)

2. Navigate the content as follows:

3. Press Up ▲ or Down ▼ to scroll through the article.

4. If there is a link to a related article or picture, press Left ◀ to select the link.
5. Press Right ▶ to access the options at the bottom of the screen.

116 Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision

To Access Movies Information Using On Demand:

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select On Demand 🔒. (The On Demand menu screen will be displayed.)

2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight Movies (the button name changes to Hollywood News & Showtimes), and press Center 📋. (A list of current movie titles will be displayed.)

3. Select a movie title.

4. From the Movie Title display, select an option and follow the onscreen instructions. Options available may include:

5. Shows for Date to select a date for the movie.

6. to view the movie's showtimes at a number of selected movie theaters in your area. Follow the onscreen instructions to purchase will-call tickets (may not be available for all theaters or for all showtimes).

Details to view the movie's details, which may include cast, running time, plot synopsis, MPAA rating, reviews, and so on.

Additional fixed On Demand categories such as Money (which features a customizable stock ticker [delayed 20 minutes]), Weather, and Sports (which allows you to select your top teams), along with optional categories such as Maps and TV Guide, bring the information you want right to your screen—all without having to go through a traditional Web search.

Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision 117

Using Your Device's Phone as a Modem

Your device's data capabilities enable you to use your device's phone as a modem for your laptop computer anywhere on the Sprint advanced wireless high-speed data network. You'll be able to send and receive email, browse the Internet, and access your company's network anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network.

Note:

To use this service, you are required to sign up on a Sprint Power Vision with Phone as Modem plan. Go to www.sprint.com or visit a Sprint Store for Phone as Modem plan details and more information.

Setting Up a Data Connection With Your Computer

In order to use your phone as a modem, you'll first need to load the Sprint PCS® Connection Manager software on your computer, and then use the sync cable to connect your device to your computer.

To set up your phone-to-computer data connection:

1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device into your computer's CD drive and select the link to download and install the Sprint PCS Connection Manager software and drivers.

2. Once the software has been fully installed, connect your device to your computer using the sync cable. (When your computer detects the connection, an icon is displayed in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen.)

3. Make sure your device's phone is turned on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55) and that one of the Power Vision icons (Tall or ) appears at the top of the screen.

Note:

If neither icon appears, you cannot use your device as a modem with Sprint PCS Connection Manager.

1. On your computer, open the Sprint PCS Connection Manager software, select your device name, and then click Connect.

2. Once the connection is established, launch an Internet session, check your email, or do anything else you would do using a traditional Internet connection.

3. When you're ready to terminate the Internet connection, double-click the Sprint PCS Connection Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then click Disconnect to end the session.

Note:

While your Power Vision data connection is active, you can receive incoming calls and place outgoing calls; however, doing either of these suspends the data connection until you hang up the call.

Sprint PCS Vision services are available on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network. Sprint Power Vision services work anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network, but broadband-like download speeds are available only in areas with high-speed data coverage.

120 Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision

Section 3C

Using Email

In This Section

What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device?
The VersaMail Application
♦ Sprint PCS Business Connection SM
Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging

What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device?

If you've activated Sprint PCS Vision®, you're ready to set up an email application on your Treo™ 700p smart device. You can use the email application with your Sprint email account, as well as with other email accounts, such as Yahoo! or Earthlink. You can also use the email application with a corporate account.

Your device includes three email application options:

•The VersaMail ^® application
Sprint PCS Business Connection SM
GoodLink™ wireless messaging

You can also access Web-based email from your device's Web browser.

Note:

An email application is not an email provider. It works with an account from a provider—your Sprint account, for example—or a corporate account to transfer messages to your device.

Which Application Should I Use?

I want to ... Use this application ...
Check free Web mail, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or Yahoo!	Web browser
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail Plus or AOL	VersaMail

122 Section 3C: Using Email

I want to ... Use this application ...
Check email from an IMAP account VersaMail
Sync my email and organizer information with my company's Exchange server	VersaMail, Business Connection, GoodLink
Sync my email with my company's Domino server VersaMail, Business Connection
Access email from one to three email accounts VersaMail, Business Connection
Access email from four to eight email accounts VersaMail
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while sending and receiving messages	GoodLink

The VersaMail Application

Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each account.

After you enter your email account settings, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for information on sending and receiving messages and customizing your VersaMail settings.

How Do I Get Started?

1. If you're entering settings for an email account on a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® server, a Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for setup steps.
2. If your email provider is listed in the following table, skip to "Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Common Providers" on page 125.

Tip:	Your email provider is the service you use to send and receive email. Your email provider's name appears between the @ symbol and the dot symbol in your email address.

AOL Comcast RCN
Apple.Mac Compu	Serve SBC/PacBell
AT&T Global Covad	SBC/Prodigy
AT&T Worldnet	EarthLink Speakeasy
Bell South Gmail	Verizon DSL

124 Section 3C: Using Email

Cablevision Mail.com Yahoo!
Charter NetZero

1. If your email provider's name is not listed, you need to obtain the following information from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to "Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Other Providers" on page 126.

Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
- Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com
- Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110 (incoming POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25 (outgoing POP or IMAP)
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP, ESMTP, SSL

Note:

The correct protocol, server, and security settings are required for VersaMail to be able to send and receive email for your account. Your email provider can easily provide these settings.

Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Common Providers

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Email

Tip:

The first time you set up VersaMail, you are asked if you want to continue with account setup after you open the application. Select Continue and go to step 3.

1. Open the menus ☐, select Accounts, select Account Setup, and then select New.
2. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name, such as Work Email.
3. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email provider, such as Earthlink. Select Next.
4. Enter the username for your email account. Your username appears before the @ symbol in your email address.
5. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next.
6. Select Next, and then select Done.

Tip: To set more options for incoming and outgoing messages, select Advanced on the Account setup complete screen.

1. On the Account Setup screen, select OK to go to the Inbox of this account.

Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Other Providers

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Email 📃.

Tip: The first time you set up VersaMail, you are asked if you want to continue with account setup after you open the application. Select Continue and go to step 3.

126 Section 3C: Using Email

1. Open the menus ☐, select Accounts, select Account Setup, and then select New.
2. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name, such as Work Email.
3. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Other.
4. Select the Protocol pick list, and then select POP or IMAP (based on the information you obtained from your system administrator or ISP). Select Next.
5. Enter the username for your email account. Your username appears before the @ symbol in your email address.
6. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next.
7. Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers, and then select Next.
8. If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or security settings, select Advanced, and then enter those settings.
9. Select Done.
10. On the Account Setup screen, select OK to go to the Inbox of this account.

Receiving and Viewing Messages

1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55).
2. Go to Applications 📋 and select Email 📧.
3. From any mailbox, select Get or Get & Send.
4. From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.
5. If a large incoming message is truncated, select More 🔒.
6. Select Done.

Managing Your Messages

The status icons that appear next to each message in your Inbox indicate the following:

Only the subject header information is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.
The message includes an attachment.
This message is high priority.

You can rearrange the VersaMail list to make it easier to find and view messages.

In the Inbox, select Sort, and then select one of the following: By Subject, By Sender, By Size, or By Date.

128 Section 3C: Using Email

- To quickly switch between folders (for example, the Inbox folder and the Sent folder), select the folder pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired folder.

Replying to Messages

1. From the Inbox or another folder, open the message to which you want to respond.
2. From Message view, select Reply. (Select whether to reply to just the sender or reply to both the sender and all other addressees on the message.)
3. Enter your reply, and then select Send.

Tip: When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the original text (see “Setting Email Preferences” on page 136).

Creating and Sending Messages

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Email 📧.
2. From the Inbox, select New.
3. Begin entering the addressee's email address, first name, or last name. (If the information matches one or more entries in Contacts, VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To accept a suggestion, select the correct contact. To send to a different address, keep entering the email address or name.)

Section 3C: Using Email 129

Tip:

To send a copy or blind copy, select Cc or Bcc, select those lines, and enter the address(es) in those fields. See “Setting Email Preferences” on page 136 for details on displaying the Bcc field. For multiple recipients in any field, enter a semicolon and then a space before entering the next recipient name or address.

1. Enter the subject and message text. (To move between fields, press Up ▲ or Down.)

Tip:

You can mark outgoing messages as high priority. Open the Options menu and select Set Priority To High.

1. Select one of the following buttons:

2. Send connects and sends all messages immediately. (If you select Send and the message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox. VersaMail makes up to five attempts to automatically send the message; if automatic send is not successful, an alert message appears and you must try to manually send the message again.)

3. Outbox puts the message in the Outbox to send later.
   Drafts saves the message so that you can continue working on it at another time.

Tip:

If you are composing a message and need to switch to another application—for example, to answer a phone call—when you return to the VersaMail application, you are returned to the message you were composing.

Attaching Pictures and Videos

1. Create the message to which you want to attach the picture or video.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3. Select Photo/Video from the Type pick list.
4. On the Select Media screen, select the Album pick list to go to the album containing the picture or
5. Select Done.

video you want, and then check the box to the left of the picture or video.

Tip:

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one picture or video to a message. To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete.

Attaching Voice Memos

1. Create the message to which you want to attach the voice memo.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon ⏻ in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3. Select Voice Memo or Voice Memo (wav) from the Type pick list.
4. Select the voice memo you want, and then select OK. If you selected Voice Memo (wav), select the voice memo you want in the Type box, and then select Add.
5. Select Done.

Attaching Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files

1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon ⏻ in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3. Select Documents from the Type pick list.
4. Select the file you want on the Documents screen.
5. Select Done.

Tip:

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one file to a message. To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete.

132 Section 3C: Using Email

Attaching Other Types of Files

1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon ⏻ in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3. Select the type of file to attach—for example, Address, Appointment, or Memo/Text—from the Type pick list. To attach a ringtone, select Sounds.
4. Select the file you want from the list in the Type box, and then select Add. If you selected Sounds, select the ringtone from the Manage Sound list, and then select Insert.
5. Select Done.

Tip:

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to attach more than one file to a message. To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete.

Viewing Attachments

You can open a number of attachment types (for example, Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; PDF files; sound files; and photos) with the built-in software on your device.

1. From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view. (Messages with downloaded attachments are indicated by a paper clip icon to the left of the message icon.)

Note:

If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the attachment is not displayed at the bottom of the message screen. Select More to download and display any attachments.

1. Select the attachment name to view it in the default viewer on your device. -or-

Select the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to save the attachment to your device or to an expansion card; or Select Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment.

1. When you have finished with the attachment, select Done to return to the Attachments dialog box. (If there is no Done button, go to Applications and select Email to return to the Inbox of the account you were using.)

Deleting a Single Message

When you delete a message, it moves to the Trash folder.

1. To delete a message from the Inbox or another message screen, highlight the message, and then press Backspace ⏻.

To delete a message you are reading or composing while the message is open, just press Backspace Ⓧ.

1. Select OK to confirm the deletion.

Tip:

To delete a single message, you can also highlight it, press Right on the 5-way, and then select Delete.

134 Section 3C: Using Email

Deleting Multiple Messages

1. On the Inbox or another folder screen, select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus so that it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag it again to select more adjacent messages.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Delete on the Message menu.
4. If a confirmation message appears, select OK to confirm deletion.

Tip:	When you delete a message inMessageview, by default you return to the Inbox. You can change the setting so that you go to the next message instead. From theOptionsmenu, selectPreferences, select Deletion, and then selectGo to Next Messagefrom the After deleting a messagepick list.

Deleting Messages by Date

You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates.

1. From the Inbox or any folder, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Delete Old on the Message menu.
3. Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete.
4. Select OK. (If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion.)

Tip:	To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the Message menu and select Empty Trash

Switching Between Accounts

You can switch between different email accounts—for example, between your work and your personal account.

1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Accounts, and then select an account.

Setting Email Preferences

You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on your Treo device. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are currently viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account separately.

You can customize the display of your mailbox screens, how and when to get new messages, alert sounds, reply options, and more. For complete instructions on customizing your email settings, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD.

Downloading New Email Messages Automatically

You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your device.

1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Auto Sync.
4. Check the Mail box next to the Auto-sync option.

1. Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12 hours. (If you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your device's battery more often.)
2. Select the Start Time and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK.
3. Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account.
4. Select OK, and then select Get or Get & Send. (Doing this ensures that only new messages are retrieved during your next Auto Sync retrieval.)

Playing Sounds When New Email Arrives

When new email messages arrive, an alert appears on the Alert screen (see "Viewing and Using the Alert Screen" on page 103 for information). In addition, when you schedule Auto Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives.

1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus ☑.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Alerts.
4. Check the Alert me of new mail box.
5. Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. The device plays a brief demo of the sound.
6. Select OK.

Note:

To receive notifications of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive notifications of both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals.

Setting Options for Receiving Messages

1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Incoming.
4. Set any of the following preferences:

Get indicates whether to get message subjects only or entire messages.
- Ask Every Time indicates whether you want to see a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. If the box is unchecked, messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the Get pick list.

- Unread messages downloads only unread mail to your device (IMAP accounts only). If you don’t choose this option and you select Get & Send, all your messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read.

Note:

The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, the Unread messages box does not appear on the Incoming preferences screen, and VersaMail downloads all messages regardless of whether you have read them.

138 Section 3C: Using Email

• Mail from last gets messages sent within the number of days you specify (default is 3).
• Download attachments allows files attached to email to be automatically downloaded to your device. Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded.
  ■ Maximum message size sets the maximum size limit, in kilobytes (KB), for how much of an incoming email message is downloaded. The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default (that is, the first 5KB of all incoming email messages is downloaded), but you can enter any size up to 2,048KB (approximately 2 megabytes, or 2MB), including attachments.

Note:

The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. To view a message whose total size is greater than the maximum message size you select but is less than 5MB, you need to select More on the message screen to fully download the message.

- Message Format sets the format in which you retrieve messages. If you choose HTML, any messages sent in HTML format appear with basic HTML formatting intact. Other messages appear as plain text. If you choose Text, all messages appear as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent.

Note:

VersaMail sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML.

5. Select OK.

Section 3C: Using Email 139

Attaching a Signature to a Message

You can attach a personal signature, with information such as your company's address and its fax and telephone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you send.

1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Signature.
4. Check the Attach Signature box.
5. Enter your signature information, and then select OK.

Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail applications on your device to directly access corporate groupware information on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 server. You can wirelessly synchronize information in these applications on the server from your device without using a desktop computer.

A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account interacts with your desktop software as follows:

• Microsoft Outlook: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on your device syncs with the server; it does not sync directly with Outlook on your desktop. However, if the server syncs with Outlook on your desktop, any information you enter in these applications on your device also appears in Outlook after the next server sync.
• Palm® Desktop software: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on your device does not sync with and does not appear in Palm® Desktop software on your computer.

Information in other applications on your device, such as Tasks and Memos, continues to sync with and appear in the desktop software on your computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop).

For complete information on using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD.

Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM

You can install the optional Sprint PCS Business Connection application for secure, real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes company email, calendar, business directory, and personal contacts. For more information and to sign up, visit www.sprint.com.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Get BC Sprint Get BC .
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the software.

After you install the Sprint PCS Business Connection application on your device, press Messaging to open the application.

For complete setup instructions, see the Email on Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700p by Palm booklet.

Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging

You can install the optional GoodLink software for secure, real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook email, calendar, contacts, tasks, and notes. GoodLink offers real-time push synchronization of email and personal information; as messages are received on the server, they are automatically downloaded to your device. GoodLink also offers attachment viewing through the Documents application on your device and integration with your corporate Global Address List (GAL).

For more information and to sign up, visit www.good.com.

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select Get Good 📄.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the software.

After you install the GoodLink on your device, press Messaging 📄 to open the software.

144 Section 3C: Using Email

Section 3D

Messaging

In This Section

• Creating and Sending Messages
  Receiving Messages
  ◆ Using Messaging to Chat
  ◆ Managing Your Messages
• Customizing Your Messaging Settings
  Using Online Services

Creating and Sending Messages

You can exchange brief text messages with other wireless phones that have text messaging capability. You can also send Sprint PCS® Picture Mail messages (including images, videos, voice memos, and text) to other users. Both text messages and Sprint PCS Picture Mail messages can also be sent to email addresses. Before you use your Treo™ 700p smart device to send or receive messages, please verify pricing and availability with Sprint.

Before you use Messaging, make sure your phone is turned on, as described in "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55.

Creating and Sending a Text Message

You can exchange text messages of up to 160 characters. Messages with more than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages.

Note:

If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is deducted from the 160-character count.

1. Press Messaging
2. Select New.
3. Select the To field to address the message:

- Press Center 📋. If the recipient's name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

146 Section 3D: Messaging

If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient's phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the message.

If the recipient's name isn't in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.

Tip:

If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option once.

1. Press Down ▼ to jump to the body of the message.
2. Enter your message or select QuickText 📊 to insert predefined phrases. To insert emoticons, select 😊

Tip:

Some symbols can't be used in text messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters.

1. (Optional) Open the menus ☐, and then select High Priority or Normal Priority on the Compose menu to set an urgency level for the message.
2. Select Send.

If you are out of a coverage area or if your device is off, outgoing messages go into the Outbox folder. When you return to a coverage area, your pending messages are sent automatically and are transferred to the Sent folder.

Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message

Sprint PCS Picture Mail messages consist of pictures, videos, text, and sounds. You can include pictures and videos you captured with the built-in camera (if included) as well as any of the following items:

• QCELP sound clips as voice memos
Pictures
Videos
• Text messages
• Voice memos

The first time you share a picture or video, you are prompted to establish a Sprint PCS Picture Mail account and password. Enter a four- to eight-digit,

alphanumeric password and press Center 📋. Once you receive confirmation, you can continue to send or upload pictures and videos.

Note:

For information about the terms of your Sprint PCS Picture Mail service, please visit http://pictures.sprintpcs.com/tos.do.

1. Press Messaging

1. Select New.
2. Select the To field to address the message:

- Press Center 📄. If the recipient's name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

148 Section 3D: Messaging

- If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient's phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the message.

- If the recipient's name is not in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the mobile number or email address.

Tip:

You may need to press Option to enter letters or numbers. The Option Lock setting defaults to the setting you used the last time you addressed a message.

4. Select Add media.

5. Select the Media icon and select one of the following:

• Attach from device lets you attach a picture or video from your device.
• Attach from Online lets you attach a picture or video from your online album. See “Using Your Online Album” on page 200 for information.

Take new picture prompts you to take a new picture with the built-in camera and attach it to the message.

Take new video prompts you to capture a new video with the built-in camcorder and attach it to the message.

1. (Optional) Repeat step 5 for each item you want to attach.

2. Enter your message or select QuickText 📊 to insert predefined phrases. To insert emoticons, select 🔒

3. Select Send.

Your device uploads the pictures or videos to the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site (www.sprint.com/picturemail), creates a private Guest Book for the recipient on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site, and sends your message to the recipient. The recipient can then use a Web browser to access this private Guest Book to view the pictures or videos and to enter comments. You can view the comments later from the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site.

If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is off, outgoing messages go into the Drafts folder. When you return to a coverage area, you can open the message in the Drafts folder and send it.

Messaging Tips

- You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses with a comma.

- When entering message text, you can insert emotive symbols by pressing and holding Center 📄 and selecting emoticons, or insert predefined QuickText phrases by selecting QuickText 📄 and then selecting a phrase. To add a new phrase, select Edit QuickText from the list.

- Not all the symbols that are available on your device can be used in your messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters before it sends messages.

- You can send and receive text messages (but not Picture Mail messages) even while you are on a phone call. This is easiest when using the hands-free headset or speakerphone.

150 Section 3D: Messaging

Receiving Messages

When your phone is on and is in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically receive new text messages. You can also configure your device to notify you when a message arrives (see “Selecting Messaging Alert Tones” on page 157).

The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:

• OK dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.
• Reply opens Chat view, where you can reply with a text message. To send a multimedia message reply, select Add from Chat view.

- Call Back dials the sender's phone number.

- Go To Msg opens the message so you can view its full contents.

- Go To opens the message so you can view its full contents in your online Sprint PCS Picture Mail

account. See “Working With Your Online Picture Mail Album” on page 201 for details.

- Delete deletes the received message directly from the message alert.

Tip:

If you have multiple alerts, the Alert screen displays all your pending alerts. Select an alert to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your device, press and hold Center on the 5-way.

Using Links in Messages

When you receive a message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go directly to the Web page.

1. Press Messaging
2. Select the message that contains the link you want to use.
3. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).

Your device automatically opens the appropriate application from the link.

Arranging Your Messages

You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the Sort command.

1. Press Messaging
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select the folder you want to sort.
3. Open the menus
4. Select View, and then select Sort by Name or Sort by Date.

152 Section 3D: Messaging

Deleting Messages

You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge command.

1. Press Messaging
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete.
3. Open the menus ☐.
4. Select Purge from the Message menu.
5. Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option.
6. Select OK.

Using Messaging to Chat

When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the upper part of Chat view displays all text messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area. You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen.

1. Press Messaging

1. Do one of the following:

• To start a new chat, select a message and reply to it.
• To continue an existing chat, select a message with the chat icon 🙏

1. Enter your message.
2. Select Send.

To find a chat you had with someone, open your Messaging Inbox and select a chat session.

Tip:

To add pictures, sounds, or videos to your message, select Add.

154 Section 3D: Messaging

Managing Your Messages

The message descriptions in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent folders show the message status:

• Unread messages appear in bold.
- Read messages appear in plain text.
• Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).

The following icons show the message type and additional status information:

A text message

A PictureMail message

A voicemail page

A chat session

A text message with an error

A PictureMail message with an error

Customizing Your Messaging Settings

1. Press Messaging

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. On the Messages tab, set any of the following preferences for your individual messages:

- Create new messages as indicates whether you default to a text message or a Sprint PCS Picture Mail message when you create a new message.

• Confirm message deletions indicates whether deletion confirmation prompts appear.

• Privacy Mode (hide text) indicates whether the body text appears in the alert when you receive a new message.

• Select the Chat tab and set any of the following preferences for chat sessions:

• Create chats from messages indicates when you want to group text messages from the same person into a chat.

• Show timestamps in chats displays next to each message the local date and time the message was sent.

• Display my name in chat window as indicates the text label for your messages in Chat view.
• Label color sets a color to differentiate your messages from the sender's messages in Chat view.

• Use color for indicates whether both your name and message appear in a different color, or only your name.

• Select OK.

Selecting Messaging Alert Tones

1. Press Messaging

1. Open the menus ☐.

2. Select Options, and then select Alerts.

3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Messaging.

4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.

5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want the vibrate option to turn on.

6. Select the Message Tone pick list, and then select a tone for incoming message alerts.

7. Check the Show Message Alerts box if you want to see an onscreen alert when a new message arrives.

8. Select Done.

Using Online Services

Sprint PCS Picture Mail Online Services let you access printing and other services for photos and videos when you compose and send a Picture Mail message from your Treo device. For example, if you send a message containing a picture, you can select an online printing service, which will print and deliver a copy of the picture to you. Additional fees may be required to use Online Services.

Accessing Online Services

1. Press Messaging
2. Select Online Services in the lower-right corner of the screen.
3. If prompted, enter or create a password.
4. If the Welcome! screen appears, select Continue.
5. Select the service you want to use.
6. Create your Picture Mail message as described in “Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message” on page 148. The media you include with the message is sent to the service you select for processing.

158 Section 3D: Messaging

Browsing the Web

In This Section

Viewing a Web Page
◆ Working With Web Pages
◆ Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages
- Customizing Your Web Browser Settings

The Web browser on your Treo™ 700p smart device provides quick and easy access to Web pages. You can view most of the sites you use on your computer, including those with security and advanced features such as JavaScript and frames. To browse the Web, you must activate Sprint PCS Vision® data services. See “Enabling Sprint PCS Vision” on page 108.

Viewing a Web Page

The Web browser uses patent-pending technology to optimize Web pages for your device. By default, the browser reformats Web pages into a single column and resizes images on your screen. That way, you can see most of the content without scrolling left or right.

1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55).
2. Go to Applications and confirm that data services are available. You should see either the food the icon.

Note:

If you do not see either of the above icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.

3. Select Web

1. Enter a Web page address (URL) in the address bar and select Go. If you browse to a secure Web page, a lock 🔒 appears in the address bar.
2. Do any of the following to navigate within the Web page:

• View a page in wide layout format (as on your computer): Open the menus ☐, select Options, and then select Wide Page Mode.

160 Section 3E: Browsing the Web

- Scroll through the page: In Optimized Mode (the default format, which is optimized for your device screen), press Up ▲ or Down ▼. In Wide Page Mode, press Up ▲, Down ▼, Left ◀, or Right ▶ to scroll in all directions.

- Follow a link to another Web page: In Optimized Mode, highlight the link by pressing Up ▲, Down ▼, Left ◀, or Right ▶, and then press Center 📋 to go to the selected page.

Tip:

In Wide Page Mode, use the stylus to tap a link.

- Submit a form: Enter the information and then select the onscreen button to submit the form. If the form doesn't have an onscreen button, press Return 🔒.

1. Use the 5-way 🔒 to access any of the following icons in the title bar:

Tip:

To quickly jump to the title bar from anywhere on a Web page, press Space to go to the address bar, and then press Up on the 5-way.

Goes to your home page.

Opens a dialog box where you can enter a Web address you want to go to or view a list of recently viewed Web pages.

Goes to the previous Web page.

Goes to the next Web page.

Refreshes the page with the latest content from the Internet.

Opens a list where you can select Fast Mode (no images or style sheets) or Normal Mode (with images and style sheets).

Tip:

The navigation bar shows status information while a page is loading. You don't have to wait for a page to fully load to navigate within the page or to select a link to another page. However, if you select a link while a page is loading and you receive a message saying that JavaScript is not ready, wait for the page to finish loading and then select the link again.

Downloading Files From a Web Page

The Web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the applications on your device. When you download a file, you can open it in the application that recognizes the file. For example, if you download a picture, you can view it later in the Pics&Videos application. If a file is not recognized by any of the applications on your device, you can download the file to an expansion card, but you cannot open it on your device.

You can download files such as new applications, and choose to play or save music and video files in many popular formats—provided that the Web site permits the downloading of files.

Item Supported File Types

Pictures JPEG, BMP, WBMP, GIF, animated GIF

Videos MP4, 3G2, ASF

Ringtones MIDI, QCELP, AAC, AAC+

Music MP3

1. Go to the page that contains the link to the file you want to download.
2. Press Left ◀ or Right ▶ to highlight the link to the file, and then press

Center

1. If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To Device, or Save To Card.

2. Select Yes.

Tip:	You can also save an image from a Web page by tapping and holding it with the stylus. In addition, you can access software and other downloads using the Downloads bookmark.

Streaming Files From a Web Page

The Web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the applications on your device. For example, you can choose to play music and video files in many popular formats, such as MP3, WMA, and WMV.

1. When the Web browser recognizes streamed content on a Web page, it displays a Play icon. To view or listen to the streamed content, tap Play.

2. Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following controls when viewing or listening:

Select to return to the original Web page.

- Select 📄 or press Center 📋 to pause playback.

- Select 🎨 or press Center 📍 to resume playback after pausing.

A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the

Close-up of purple water lilies with green leaves, no visible text or symbols

164 Section 3E: Browsing the Web

content on the full screen. Press Up ▲ or Down ▼ to display the

toolbar; press Up ▲ or Down ▼ again to hide the toolbar again.

- Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.

Note:

If the Web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported by any application on your device, a “Media type not supported” message appears.

Copying Text From a Web Page

You can copy text from a Web page and paste it into other applications.

1. Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Edit, and then select Copy.
4. Go to the application in which you want to paste the text, and then use the 5-way or the stylus to position the cursor where you want to paste the text.
5. Open the menus ☐.
6. Select Edit, and then select Paste.

Returning to Recently Viewed Pages

The History list stores the addresses of the last one hundred pages you visited. Items in the History list are sorted chronologically.

1. From Page view, open the menus ☐.
2. Select History from the Page menu.
3. Press Down ▼ to navigate through the list.
4. Select the Web page you want to load.

Tip:

To clear all items from the History list, select Clear All. To bookmark any page on the list, highlight the page and then select Bookmark. If you clear all History list items, the Web browser does not suggest any entries when you begin entering a Web address, even if you have the Auto-complete feature turned on (see “Customizing Your Web Browser Settings” on page 170 for information on Auto-complete).

Finding Text on a Web Page

1. From Page view, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Find Text on Page on the Page menu.
3. Enter the text you want to find.
4. Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you want the search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the search reaches the end of the page.
5. Select Find to start the search.

Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages

Creating a Bookmark

With bookmarks, you can quickly access a Web page without entering the address every time. The Web browser can store up to one hundred bookmarks or saved pages, allowing you to open your favorite Web pages quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a favorite button (see “Defining Favorite Buttons” on page 78).

1. Go to the page you want to bookmark.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu.
4. (Optional) Change the entries in the Name and Description fields.
5. Select OK, and then select OK again.

Saving a Page

You can use the Web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so that you don't need an Internet connection to view it later.

1. Go to the page you want to save.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Save Page from the Page menu.
4. Select OK, and then select OK again.

Viewing Bookmarks or Saved Pages

Bookmarks and saved pages appear in Bookmarks view. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark.

1. Select the Bookmarks view icon 📋.
2. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view.

Editing or Deleting a Bookmark or Saved Page

1. From Bookmarks view, open the menus.

2. Select Edit Bookmarks from the Bookmarks menu.

3. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to edit or delete.

4. Enter the desired changes.

5. Select OK.

Arranging Bookmarks and Saved Pages

Bookmarks view includes ten pages of bookmarks, so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page.

1. From Bookmarks view, open the menus
2. Select Edit Bookmarks on the Bookmarks menu.
3. Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.

4. Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into another slot on the current page of bookmarks. To move a bookmark to a different page, drag and drop it onto the Bookmark Page icon

5. Select OK.

Palm	Sprint
Yahoo! News	Weather
Google Local	ESPN
Yahoo Movies	Yahoo Finance
Google	Mapquest

Customizing Your Web Browser Settings

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.

3. Select Page and set any of the following preferences:

4. Start With indicates which view is displayed every time you open the Web browser.
   Home Page indicates which Web page appears when you select

5. Restore Default resets the home page to the original Sprint PCS Vision home page if you changed it.

6. Show Address Bar indicates whether the Web address appears in Page view. When the address bar is visible, you can select the pick list next to it to go to a previously viewed page or enter a URL directly from Page view.

7. Select General and set any of the following preferences:

8. Auto-complete indicates whether the Web browser suggests text, based on your previous entries, when you enter information.

9. Disable cookies indicates whether Web sites can store personalized information on your Treo device. Some sites do not work properly if you select this option.

170 Section 3E: Browsing the Web

• Disable Javascript bypasses JavaScript elements on the Web pages you view.
• Tap and Drag indicates whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls through the content of the page.
• Normal mode/Fast mode indicates whether you want to hide selected items so that Web pages load faster. When you select Fast Mode, you can set the following options:

- Disable cascading style sheets indicates whether style sheets are applied when you load a Web page. When style sheets are disabled, pages download faster, but you may lose some of the formatting.

- Don’t download images! indicates whether images appear when you load a Web page. If you select not to view images, you can still see any image by tapping and holding the placeholder box on the Web page with the stylus.

1. Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences:

2. Set memory limit for storing pages sets the amount of memory used for your cache. Pages are cached so that they load faster the next time you view them.

3. Cookies indicates how much memory is being used by cookies. To free up this memory, select Clear Cookies.
4. Cache indicates how much memory is being used by your cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this memory, select Clear Cache.
5. Clear cache on exit indicates whether the cache clears each time you exit the Web browser.

- Set Proxy sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection requires a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or IT administrator for this information.

6. Select OK.

Note:

Setting a proxy server may prevent you from accessing some Sprint PCS Vision Web pages.

Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

In This Section

Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
◆ Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem

Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

With your Treo™ 700p smart device's built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can connect to a number of devices enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, such as a headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as well as to other phones and handhelds that are enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. When you connect to another device, you create a partnership (also referred to by terms such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing) with that device. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem.

You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your Treo device. When communicating with trusted devices, your Treo device skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in ideal conditions. Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

When you configure a headset (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device” on page 84), the headset is automatically added to your trusted device list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your trusted device list, such as your computer or GPS device enabled with Bluetooth technology.

Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings

To use your Treo device's Bluetooth functionality, you need to turn the Bluetooth feature on, and you may need to make your device either temporarily or permanently visible. You can also enter a name for your device.

174 Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Bluetooth

1. Select On.

2. Enter a device name for your Treo device. (This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth device's screen when it connects to your Treo device. You need to enter a device name only once.)

3. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:

- Visible enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device. Your device remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off.

- Temporary enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device during the next two minutes. Your device reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

Important:

For your Treo device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to On, and visibility must be set to Visible or Temporary. Your Treo device screen does not need to be turned on. If you are requesting a connection with another device, or if you are accepting a request from a trusted device, your Treo device can be set to any of the Visibility options.

- Hidden allows only devices with which you have previously formed a partnership to request a connection with your Treo device. New devices cannot request a connection.

Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking 175

Requesting a Connection With Another Bluetooth Device

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Bluetooth 🔒.
2. If you have not already done so, enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in "Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings" on page 174.
3. Select Setup Devices.
4. Select Trusted Devices.
5. Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.
6. Select the Show pick list and select Nearby devices.
7. If the device you want to add doesn't appear in the discovery results list, make sure that the other device is ready to receive a connection request (see the device's documentation), and then select Find More on your Treo device to search again.
8. Enter the same passkey on your Treo device and on the Bluetooth device, and then select OK.

Important:

Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, may have a built-in passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the passkey. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the Bluetooth device has a built-in passkey, see the device's documentation for the passkey.

1. Select Done.

176 Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

Accepting a Connection From Another Bluetooth Device

1. To prepare your Treo device to be able to accept a connection from a requesting device, enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in "Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings" on page 174.
2. Enter the same passkey on your Treo device and on the Bluetooth device.

Important:

Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, may have a built-in passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the passkey. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the Bluetooth device has a built-in passkey, see the device's documentation for the passkey.

3. Select OK.

Note:

Make sure you close the Bluetooth application after you set up devices and partnerships.

Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem

Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts the phone on your Treo device into a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. You can set up DUN in one of two ways:

• If you have signed up on a Sprint Power Vision with Phone as Modem plan, you can use the Sprint Connection Manager software on your computer and connect your Treo device to your computer using the USB sync cable; see “Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem” on page 118 for information.
• If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set up your Treo device as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.

This section describes the process of setting up your device as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.

Creating a DUN Connection Using Bluetooth Technology

To configure DUN using Bluetooth technology, complete the following procedures:

• “Creating a Partnership Between Your Device and Your Computer” on page 179.
• “Setting Up Your Computer for a Bluetooth DUN Connection” on page 180.
• “Accessing the Internet Using a Bluetooth DUN Connection” on page 180.

178 Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

Creating a Partnership Between Your Device and Your Computer

Note:

If your computer is not enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you may be able to purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter accessory for your computer.

1. Make sure that your computer's Bluetooth setting is on and that your computer is ready to create a Bluetooth partnership. Check the documentation that came with your computer to find and change these settings.
2. On your device, go to Applications 📞 and select Bluetooth 🔒.
3. Select On if it is not selected, and then select Setup Devices.
4. Select Trusted Devices.
5. Select Add Device. The discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.
6. Select your computer from the Trusted Devices list, and then select OK.
7. Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth Security screen, and then select OK. The passkey can be any number of up to 16 characters.
8. Enter the same passkey number on your computer when prompted.
9. Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth screen.

Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking 179

Note:

You must enter the same passkey on your device and your computer. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

Setting Up Your Computer for a Bluetooth DUN Connection

Dial-up networking must be enabled or installed on your computer. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN. Your wireless service provider may provide customized software programs that walk you through the DUN setup process. Check with your wireless service provider to see if such a program is available.

Accessing the Internet Using a Bluetooth DUN Connection

The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on your operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your computer—for example, if it is built in versus if you are using a wireless Bluetooth adapter. If the following procedure does not work with your computer, check your computer’s documentation for how to set up Bluetooth technology to access the Internet using a DUN connection.

Note:

You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate email. Check with your system administrator for more information.

Before you begin, verify that DUN is enabled on both your computer and your device.

180 Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

1. Open the Bluetooth screen on your computer and look for the option for paired devices. Check your computer's documentation for how to open this screen and for the name of the paired devices option.

2. Double-click the icon or option representing your device. Your computer connects to your device and shows that DUN services are available.

3. Double-click the DUN icon.

4. Enter the following in the Dial field: #777. You do not need to enter anything in the User Name or Password field.

5. Click Dial. Once the connection is successfully established, you can browse the Internet on your computer or download your email.

Tip:

You may be asked if you want to remember this dial text for this connection. We recommend that you choose to remember the dial text to avoid errors and the inconvenience of entering it for every session.

To verify that you are connected, look for a network connection icon in the taskbar at the bottom of your computer screen. To check the status of the connection, right-click the Bluetooth network icon.

Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking 181

Note:

When a Bluetooth DUN connection is active, you cannot form a partnership with another device or discover another device. You also cannot send or receive information wirelessly directly from your device, browse the Web, or send or receive email messages, and any scheduled automatic email retrievals do not take place. Incoming calls are automatically sent to voicemail. You can make outgoing calls, but the DUN session will be terminated when you place the call.

Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet Session

On your computer, right-click the icon or option representing your device, and then click Disconnect.

182 Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking

Your Portable Media Device

Sprint

Section 4A

Working With Your Pictures and Videos

In This Section

Taking Pictures and Videos
- Customizing Your Camera Settings
- Viewing Pictures and Videos
Organizing Pictures and Videos
◆ Using Your Online Album
- Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer

Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos 185

Taking Pictures and Videos

The camera version of the Treo™ 700p smart device comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your device, use your pictures as your wallpaper in the Main view of the Phone application, and as caller ID images.

If your Treo device doesn't have a built-in camera, the sections in this chapter about taking photos and videos don't apply to you. But you can still receive and view photos and videos, send photos and videos to other people as attachments or as Sprint PCS® Picture Mail, and use photos to personalize your device (such as wallpaper or photo caller ID; see “Assigning a Caller ID Picture” on page 91 for details).

You can also upload pictures and videos to albums on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site (www.sprint.com/picturemail), move them to an expansion card, and copy them to your Windows computer by synchronizing your device with your computer.

Additional fees may apply for Sprint PCS Picture Mail service. Contact Sprint for additional information.

Note:

The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x 240) resolution. The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288) resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144) resolution. See “Customizing Your Camera Settings” on page 191 for information on accessing camera and camcorder settings.

Taking a Picture

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Camera 📋.
2. By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the Palm album on your device. If you have an expansion card inserted in your device's expansion card slot, the Camera application creates a Palm album on the card and stores pictures there. To store the picture in a different location, select the album pick list in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then do one of the following:

- Select to store the picture in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album (device or expansion card).

- Select New Albums to open a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location (device or expansion card).

1. (Optional) Adjust the zoom setting by pressing Up ▲ to select 2x or pressing Down ▼ to select 1x.

2. Point the lens on the back of your device at the subject you want to photograph.

3. Press Center ☐ to take the picture.

1. Select one of the following buttons:

Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2.

Deletes the picture.

Lets you add a voice caption.

Red pickup truck parked on grass with a phone icon at bottom right (no readable text or symbols)

Opens a list of options for sending the picture:

- Select Send with PictureMail to send the picture as part of a Picture Mail message (see “Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message” on page 148).

- Select Send with Online Services to send the picture using one of the available Sprint PCS Vision® Online Services (see “Using Online Services” on page 158).

- Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the picture to your online album (see "Using Your Online Album" on page 200).

Recording a Video

1. Go to Applications and select Camcorder

2. By default, the Camcorder application stores videos you record in the Palm album on your device. If you have an expansion card inserted in your device's expansion card slot, the Camcorder application creates a Palm album on the card and stores videos there. To store the video in a different location, select the album pick list in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then do one of the following:

188 Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos

• Select to store the video in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album (device or expansion card).

• Select New Albums to open a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location (device or expansion card).

• Adjust the position of your device until you see the subject you want to record on the screen.

1. Press Center 📋 to start recording.
2. After you finish recording, press Center 📄 again to stop.
3. Select one of the following buttons:

Begins playback.

Saves the video in the location you selected

in step 2.

Deletes the video.

Red pickup truck parked on grass with a phone icon at bottom right (no readable text or symbols)

Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during playback.

Opens a list of options for sending the video:

Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos 189

• Select Send with PictureMail to send the video as part of a Picture Mail message (see “Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message” on page 148).
• Select Send with Online Services to send the video using one of the available Sprint PCS Vision Online Services (see “Using Online Services” on page 158).
• Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the video to your online album (see “Using Your Online Album” on page 200).

Note:

The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you have left, based on the space available on your device or expansion card. Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving, how many colors you are recording, and so on.

Customizing Your Camera Settings

You can customize the built-in camera's settings for your Treo device.

1. Open Camera or Camcorder, and then open the menus ☑. If you are in Camera view, the Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder view, the Video Settings screen appears.

2. Adjust any of the following settings:

3. Effects sets the color palette for the current picture or video. You can't change an item's palette after you take the picture or video.

4. Prompt sound (Pictures only) sets the sound that plays before you take the picture.
5. Shutter sound indicates whether a sound is played when you take a picture.
6. Microphone (Videos only) turns the microphone on and off so that you can record videos with or without sound.
7. Resolution sets the default size for newly captured pictures or videos.
8. Date stamp (Photos only) indicates whether the date the picture is taken appears on your pictures.

• Review photos/videos indicates whether you can review pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically saved.
• Auto naming assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured, such as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.

3. Select Done.

Viewing Pictures and Videos

Viewing a Picture

In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Your device supports the following picture formats:

JPG BMP
TIF GIF

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos 📁.
2. Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.
3. Select the picture you want to view.
4. Press Right ▶ or Left ◀ to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. If the picture has a voice caption, select to hear it.
6. Tap the photo or press Center 📋 to return to Thumbnail view.

Tip:

You can also send a photo or video from Thumbnail view. Select the photo or video, select the Send icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then select the sending option you want.

Viewing a Video

In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camcorder, you can view videos captured on many popular digital video cameras.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Pics&Videos 📃.
2. Select the album that contains the video you want to see.
3. Select the video you want to view. Playback begins automatically.
4. Hold down Right ▶ or Left ◀ to seek within the current video, or press Right ▶ or Left ◀ to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. Tap the video or press Center 📋 to return to Thumbnail view.

Viewing a Slide Show

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos 📁.
2. Highlight or select the album you want to view.
3. (Optional) Open the menus ☐, select Options, and then select Auto-hide Toolbar On.
4. Press Space ☐ to start the slide show.
5. Tap the screen to return to the previous view.

Tip:

To set slide show options such as background music and transitions, open the Album menu and select Slideshow Setting. Keep in mind that background music overrides audio captions when you're running a slide show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that is playing using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your device if you start a slide show.

194 Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos

Organizing Pictures and Videos

After you take pictures and record videos, you can organize them into albums on your device or use your online album (see “Using Your Online Album” on page 200).

Creating Albums on Your Device

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos
2. Select Create New Album.
3. Enter an album name, and then select OK.

Tip:

If you have an expansion card inserted into your device's expansion card slot, you can choose to create the album on the card.

Arranging Albums

After you create an album, you can add items to or remove items from that album.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos
2. Select the album you want to organize.

Tip:

From Thumbnail view, select the List/Thumbnail icon to the right of the Camera icon in the lower-left corner of the screen to display the list of albums.

Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos 195

1. To add pictures or videos to an album, select .

To remove pictures or videos from an album, open the menus ☐, select Album, and then select Remove from album.

1. Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select Select All to add or remove the entire album. (A plus sign [+] indicates that you want to add the item; an X indicates that you want to remove the item.)

2. Select Add or Remove.

Copying Pictures and Videos

You can copy pictures and videos into another album. You can also copy pictures and videos between your device and an expansion card.

Tip:

Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage pictures and videos on an expansion card.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos 📁.
2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy.

Tip:

From Camera view or Camcorder view, select the icon in the lower-left corner of the screen to display the list of albums.

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Copy to from the Photo (or Video) menu.

196 Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos

1. Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select Select All to copy the entire album. (A plus sign [+] appears next to selected items.)

1. Select Copy.
2. Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to copy the selected items to your device or to an expansion card.
3. Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to copy the selected items to.
4. Select Copy.

Tip:

You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the Photo (or Video) menu and select Move to. The remaining steps are the same as those for copying pictures, but the command names display Move instead of Copy.

Saving a Picture as Wallpaper

You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main view in the Phone application.

1. Open the picture you want to save as wallpaper.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Wallpaper.
4. When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or decline by selecting No.

Tip:

Press Phone to view the new wallpaper in the Phone application.

Adding a Picture to a Contact Entry

1. Open the picture you want to add to a contact.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Contact.
4. Select the contact you want to add this picture to.

Rotating a Picture

1. Open the picture you want to rotate.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
4. Select the orientation.

198 Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos

Deleting a Picture or Video

1. Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Delete from the Photo (or Video) menu.
4. Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select Select All to delete the entire album. (An X appears next to the selected items.)
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Delete to confirm the deletion.

Tip:	You can also highlight a picture or video in Thumbnail view, and then press Backspace on your device keyboard to delete the highlighted item.

Using Your Online Album

Uploading Pictures to Your Online Album

Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail account includes an online album on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site. You can use your online album to store and view pictures from your device or from a computer with Internet access.

Note:

If you have not previously accessed your online album or used Sprint PCS Picture Mail Online Services, you are prompted to create a password.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos

2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to upload.

3. Select, and then select Upload to Online Albums.

4. Select the picture(s) or video(s) you want to upload.

5. Select Upload.

200 Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos

Working With Your Online Picture Mail Album

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Pics&Videos
2. Select the album pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then select Online.
3. Select the online album containing the items you want to view.
4. Follow the steps described in "Viewing a Picture" or "Viewing a Video" on page 194 to view a picture or video.

Tip:

You can also download and play videos from your online album, and you can listen to voice captions that are attached to pictures, too.

Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer

When you synchronize your smart device, your pictures and videos are copied to your desktop computer. You can view pictures in JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format (.3G2 file extension). You can email them to friends using your desktop email application.

On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos in the Palm Media desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop software and click the Media icon. You can refer to the Palm Desktop Online Help for information about using the Palm Media desktop application.

Tip:

You can also view, download, and manage your pictures and videos from your computer at www.sprint.com/picturemail.

Listening to Music

In This Section

Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3
◆ Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer
Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device
◆ Listening to Music on Your Treo Device

You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your Treo™ 700p smart device, or through the included stereo headphones. To listen to music on your device, you need to convert the music files into MP3 format using Windows Media Player (Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer the music files to your device or to an expansion card. After you transfer the music files, you can play them using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your device.

Important:

Mac users must transfer music files to an expansion card.

Section 4B: Listening to Music 203

Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3

On a Windows computer, you need to set Windows Media Player settings to save your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be compatible with Pocket Tunes.

1. Connect your device to your computer with the sync cable.
2. On your device, go to Applications and select pTunes
3. On your computer, open Windows Media Player, and then click the full-screen icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window.
4. Click Tools, and then click Options.
5. Click the Rip Music tab, click the Format pick list, and then select mp3. Click OK.
6. Click Tools, and then click Options.
7. Click the Devices tab, select your Treo device from the Devices list, and then click Properties.

204 Section 4B: Listening to Music

1. Click the Quality tab and uncheck the Convert files as required by this handheld (recommended) box. Click Apply.
2. Click OK, and then click OK again.

Setting Up iTunes for MP3

On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to convert music from a CD to MP3 format. For more information on using the iTunes software, see the documentation that came with your Mac.

1. On your Mac, open iTunes.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Click the Advanced button at the top of the window, and then click Importing.
4. Click the Import Using pop-up menu and select MP3 Encoder.
5. (Optional) Click the Setting pop-up menu and select Good Quality.

Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer

The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer's hard drive, you need to transfer them to your device to listen to them on your device.

If an expansion card is inserted into the device, on a Windows computer, Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card. If you don't have an expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to device memory.

If you are transferring MP3 files from a Mac computer, you must insert an expansion card into the device. You cannot transfer MP3 files to device memory from a Mac.

Important:

You must synchronize your device with your computer at least once before you can transfer MP3 files from your computer.

1. Connect your Treo device to your computer with the USB sync cable.
2. On your device, go to Applications and select pTunes
3. If you are transferring from a Mac computer, insert an expansion card into your device. This step is optional for Windows users.
4. Do one of the following:

- Windows. Open Windows Media Player on your computer. Select the Sync tab, and then select Palm Handheld from the drop-down list. Select Start Sync.

The files are transferred to your device or to an expansion card automatically; do not press the sync button on the sync cable.

- Mac. Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder. Select your device name (username), the file name, and the destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize your device with your computer. Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several minutes.

Tip:

You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a “Music” folder in the root directory of the card, and store your MP3 files in this folder.

Note:

Please note that there may be restrictions that prevent you from downloading, viewing and/or copying a video or music file (for example, DVD, CD, or MP3 file). You may also be prohibited from providing copies of the video or music file to any third person. It is your responsibility to ensure that you have obtained the legal right to use the video or music file for personal use and to honor any restrictions imposed by the original content providers.

Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device

If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, you need to convert them to MP3 format on your computer before you transfer the files to your device.

On a Windows computer:

1. Open the Windows Media Player application.
2. Insert the music CD into your computer's CD drive.
3. Select the Rip tab.

4. Select the tracks you want to rip from the CD.

5. Select Rip Music.

6. Transfer the MP3 files to your device as described in "Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer" on page 206.

On a Mac computer:

1. Open iTunes.
2. Insert the music CD into your computer's CD drive.
3. Check the boxes next to the tracks that you want to convert to MP3.
4. Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
5. After the songs are imported, click the Eject Disk button in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
6. Transfer the MP3 files to your device as described in "Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer" on page 206.

208 Section 4B: Listening to Music

Listening to Music on Your Treo Device

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select pTunes 🔒.
2. Do any of the following:

• To play the current song, select Play or press Space.
• To play the next song, select Next Song 📋.
- To play the previous song, select Previous Song 📄.
- To play a different song, select Choose Songs and select a song from the list.
- To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button on the side of your device.
- To pause playback, select Pause

Tip:

You can also use the 5-way to navigate among songs, pause and resume playback, and adjust the volume during playback.

Section 4B: Listening to Music 209

Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you select Pause 📄. Music continues to play even if you switch to another application or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the Background Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable Background Playback box, and then select OK.

Tip:

If you don't hear anything when you play a song, make sure the Ringer switch is set to Sound On. See "Silencing Sounds" on page 284 for more information.

Creating a Playlist

If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can create a playlist.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select pTunes 🔒.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Select New, and then enter a name for the playlist.

5. Select Save List.

6. Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist.

To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select All.

210 Section 4B: Listening to Music

Editing a Playlist

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select pTunes 🌐.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Highlight the playlist you want to edit, and then select Edit.
5. Do any of the following:

■To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then select Remove.
- To add a song, select Add Song, check a song's box, and then select Done.
- To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select the up or down arrow.

6. Select Save List.

Tip:

To delete a playlist, select Playlists, select Manage Playlists from the Actions menu, select the playlist, and then select Delete List. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.

212 Section 4B: Listening to Music

Section 4C

Watching Sprint TV ^SM

In This Section

• Accessing Streamed Media
• Viewing Streamed Media

Accessing Streamed Media

The Sprint TV application enables you to view streamed audio and video media from various channels on your Treo™ 700p smart device. You can choose from a list of provided channels, or purchase additional channels so that you can download and view the programs you want.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Sprint TV 📁.
2. Navigate to the channel list you want as follows:

• To go back one channel screen, select Back.

Note:

The Back option does not appear on the default channel screen.

- To go back to the main channel list, select Home.

1. To stream audio or video content, select a

channel. The icon indicates audio content;

the icon indicates video content. The icon indicates that the channel contains multiple content items. Select the channel to view all items.

Note:

To view information about the selected channel or program, select Info. Select Done on the Info screen when you have finished viewing the information..

214 Section 4C: Watching Sprint TV

1. (Optional) Select Stop 📋 or press Center 📋 to pause the connection to the server before streaming begins. Select Play 🕒 or press Center 🏠 again to resume streaming.

Tip:	From a channel or folder screen, you can also use the keyboard to enter a channel number, and then select OK to go to that channel.

Viewing Streamed Media

Once you connect to the server, playback begins immediately. Use the following controls when viewing or listening to streaming media:

- Select to return to the channel list.

- Select 📄 or press Center 📋 to pause playback of nonlive content such as videos on demand.

- Select or press Center to stop playback of live content.

- Select 🎨 or press Center 📍 to resume playback after pausing.

- Select 📄 or press Left ◀ to view the channel list with the first channel highlighted.

- Select 📷 or press Right ▶ to view the channel list with the last channel highlighted.

A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the content on the full screen. Press Up ▲ or Down ▼ to display the toolbar; press Up ▲ or Down ▼ again to hide the toolbar again.

- Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.

Close-up of purple water lilies with green leaves, displayed within a browser window (no text or symbols on the main image)

Your Mobile Organizer

Sprint

Section 5A

Using Your Device's Organizer Features

In This Section

Contacts
◆ Calendar
Tasks
♦ Memos

Contacts

Contacts is where you enter information about people you know. You can access this information from the Phone application to dial phone numbers and create favorites, and from the Messaging and email applications to send messages. When you create a contact, you can also assign a caller ID picture or ringtone to that contact, so that you know when that person is calling.

If you have several contacts to enter, it's more efficient to use Palm® Desktop software or MicrosoftOutlook on your computer and then synchronize information between your Treo™ 700p smart device and your computer. For more information, see “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33.

Note:

If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your contacts information (as well as email and calendar information) synchronizes directly with your company’s Exchange server. You retrieve contacts (and email and calendar) updates from the server; they are not updated when you synchronize directly with your computer. See “Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on page 141.

Adding a Contact

1. Press Phone

1. Select the Contacts favorite button.

Tip: You can also open Contacts from Applications view.

220 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

1. Select New Contact.
2. Use the 5-way navigator 📋 to move between fields as you enter information.
3. (Optional) Do any of the following:

- Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture box, and then do one of the following:

• Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact when you save the picture.

• Select Photos to add an existing picture to this contact.

• Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone from the list to give incoming calls from this contact a distinctive ring.

• Place the entry in a category or mark it private: Select Details (see “Working With Private Entries” on page 302 for more information).
• Add a note to an entry: Select Note 📋.
• Display additional fields for this contact: Select Plus

Tip:

You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit Categories, and then select the category. Select a ringtone on the Edit Category screen.

1. To place the entry in a category or mark it private, select Details (see "Working With Private Entries" on page 302 for more information).
2. To add a note to an entry, select Note ☐.

Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features 221

1. To display additional fields for this contact, select Plus ✝.

2. After you enter all the information, select Done.

Tip:

If you make an outgoing call or receive an incoming call that has caller ID and the phone number is not associated with a contact in your Contacts list, you can either create a new contact for that number or add the number to an existing contact. See “Saving Phone Numbers” on page 70 for details.

Viewing or Changing Contact Information

1. In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit:

2. First name (JOH for John).

3. Last name (SMI for Smith).
   ■First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).

4. Select the name of the entry you want to open.

5. Select Edit.
6. Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done.

Deleting a Contact

1. Open the contact you want to delete.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Delete Contact on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.

222 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

Defining Your Business Card

1. Create a new contact with your own business card information.
2. Open the contact entry containing your business information.
3. Open the menus ☐.
4. Select Select Business Card on the Record menu.

After you define your business card, you can beam it to other Palm OS ^® devices. In Contacts or in any Phone view, open the menus and select Beam Business Card on the Record menu.

Calendar

Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage your schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information.

If you have several appointments to enter, it's more efficient to use Palm Desktop software or MicrosoftOutlook on your computer and then synchronize information between the Treo 700 smart device and your computer. For more information, see “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33.

Note:

If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your calendar information (as well as email and contacts information) synchronizes directly with your company's Exchange server. You retrieve calendar (and email and contacts) updates from the server; they are not updated when you synchronize directly with your computer. See “Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on page 141.

Displaying Your Calendar

- Press Calendar repeatedly to cycle through the various views:

■ Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or

224 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

due today. If there's room, Agenda view also shows your schedule for the next dates that have events scheduled.

■ Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time.
■ Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.
■ Month View shows your schedule for a whole month.

• From any Calendar view, open the Options menu and select Year View to view a calendar for an entire year.
• From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), use the 5-way navigator 📋 or stylus to move to another day, week, month, or year (based on the current view).
• From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), select Go To, and then select a date from the calendar.

Tip:

You can customize your phone to display the most current Calendar event on the Main view in the Phone application. Press Phone, open the Options menu, and then select Phone Display Options. Check the Show Calendar event box.

Creating an Event

1. Press Calendar 📄 until Day view appears.
2. Press Left ◀ or Right ▶ to select the desired day.

1. Select New.
2. Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event. (For example, enter 545 for 5:45. Remember to press Option ☐ before entering numbers.)
3. Select the End Time box, and then select the ending hour and minute for the event.
4. (Optional) To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time Zone pick list and select a city in the time zone you want.
5. Select OK.
6. Enter a description for the event.

226 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

Time Zones and Events

Here are some important points to keep in mind when assigning a time zone to an event:

• Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. If you sync with Palm Desktop software, you can add time zones to your events, but the start and end times do not change in Palm Desktop if you go to a different time zone.
• If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must install the conduit that came with your Treo 700p smart device (that is, you must install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD and select to sync with Outlook) or a subsequent update on all the computers you synchronize your device with. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones.

- To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the Options menu, select Preferences, and check the New events use time zones box. All your new events will be assigned to your local time zone, and you can change this setting for individual events. In addition, if you sync with Outlook and you select the time zone option on the Calendar conduit sync screen, then time zones will sync for any new events you create in Outlook. Time zone settings are not added to any events that you created before you set these time zone settings.

- If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless of the time zone you are in, uncheck the Get time zone from mobile network box on the Date & Time Preferences screen. If the box is checked, the event time shifts if you travel to a different time zone. See “Setting the Date and Time” on page 294 for information.

Adding an Alarm to an Event

1. In Calendar, select the event.
2. Select Details.

1. Check the Alarm box, and then select the number of minutes, hours, or days before the event you would like to receive the alarm.

Note:

The alarm for untimed events (see “Creating an Untimed Event” on page 228) is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the date of the event.

4. Select OK.

When an alarm goes off, an alert is also displayed on the Alert screen. Select an alert's description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert. See "Viewing and Using the Alert Screen" on page 103 for more information.

Creating an Untimed Event

An untimed event is an event that does not occur at a particular time of day—for example, a holiday or anniversary.

228 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

1. Press Calendar 📄 until you are in Day view.
2. Press Left ◀ or Right ▶ to go to the date of the event.
3. Make sure that no times are highlighted.
4. Enter a description for the event. A diamond appears next to the description of an untimed event.

Scheduling a Repeating Event

1. Create an event, and then select it.
2. Select Details.
3. Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. (If the interval you need doesn't appear on the list, select Other to define a custom interval.)
4. For weekly events, select the day(s) the event is repeated; for monthly events, select Day or Date to indicate the repeating method.
5. If the event has an ending date, select the End on pick list, select Choose Date, and then select the ending date.
6. Select OK.

Tip:

To enter a birthday or anniversary, add the information to the person's Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar.

This Icon Indicates a Repeating Event

Color-Coding Your Schedule

Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make your appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow these steps to create a category and assign it a color code:

1. From Day view, select the event description or select an empty time slot.
2. Select Details.
3. Select the Category pick list, and then select Edit Categories.

4. Do one of the following:

5. To create a new category, select New and then enter a category name.

6. To add a color to an existing category, select a category, and then select Edit.

7. Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK.

8. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.
9. Select OK two more times.

Now that the category is set up, you can assign a specific event to this category. See the next section for details.

230 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

Editing or Deleting an Event

Tip:

To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the Record menu and select Purge. Select the Delete Events Older Than pick list and select a timeframe. Select OK.

1. Select the event you want to edit or delete.
2. Select Details.

3. In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also change any of the following settings:

4. Date and Time display when the event takes place. Change these settings to reschedule the event.

5. Location provides space for you to enter a description of where the event takes place.
6. Category sets the color-coded category for this event.
7. Note ☐ provides space for you to enter additional text.
8. Delete removes the event from your Calendar.

4. Select OK.

Tip:

If you synchronize with Microsoft Outlook and your events include other people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee information appears in this field after you synchronize.

Customizing Display Options for Your Calendar

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Display Options.

Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features 231

1. Select the Default View pick list, and then select the view you want to see when you open Calendar.

2. Select the Agenda box and set any of the following Agenda view options:

3. Show Due Tasks displays tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue.

4. Show Messages displays the number of read and unread email messages.
   Background displays a favorite picture as the Agenda view background. Check the

Background box, select the picture thumbnail, and then select a picture. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the picture.

1. Select the Day box and set any of the following Day view options:

• Show Category List displays the category pick list.
- Show Time Bars activates the time bars that appear in Day view. The time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate event conflicts.

- Compress Day View controls how times appear in Day view. When Compress Day View is unchecked, all time slots are displayed on the screen. When it is checked, start and end times are displayed for each event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling.

232 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

- Show Category Column displays the color-coded category marker between the time and the description to indicate which category the event is filed under.

1. Select the Month box and set any of the following Month view options:

■ Show Category List displays the category pick list.
Timed Events displays events that are scheduled for a specific time.
- Untimed Events displays events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time.

■ Daily Repeating Events displays events that are repeated every day.

1. Select OK.

Selecting Alarm Tones

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Calendar.
4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.

5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select how you want your device to vibrate for an event alarm.

6. Select any of the following:

7. Alarm Sound sets the tone played the first time your alarm goes off.

8. Reminder Sound sets the tone played if an alarm is not acknowledged and the alarm repeats itself.

- Repeat indicates how many times the alarm repeats itself if it is not acknowledged.

- Default Alarm sets the default number of minutes, hours, or days before an event that the alarm goes off.

7. Select Done.

Tip:	You can also preview, delete, and send sounds that you use as alarms. From the Sounds & Alerts Preferences screen, select Manage. To play a sound, select it and press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound, select it and press Backspace, and to send a sound, select it and then select Send.

Tasks

You can use the Tasks application to keep track of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of completed tasks.

Adding a Task

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select Tasks
2. Select New to create a new task.
3. Enter a description of the task. (The text can be longer than one line.)

Setting Task Priority, Due Date, and Other Details

The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category, privacy flag, and note to each task.

1. Select the task to which you want to assign details.
2. Select Details.

3. Set any of the following:

4. Priority sets the Priority number for this task (1 is most important). You can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task.
   Category assigns the task to a specific category.

5. Due Date sets the due date for the task. Select the Due Date pick list and select a due date.
   Alarm sets an alarm for this task.

6. Repeat indicates whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how often it repeats. When you check off a repeating task, the next instance of this task automatically appears in your task list.

7. Private indicates whether the task is private. Check this box to mark this task private. See “Working With Private Entries” on page 302 for additional information.
   stores additional text you want to associate with the task.

4. Select OK.

Tip:

You can also set the priority by tapping the Priority number next to a task in the Tasks list and then selecting a priority level from the list.

236 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

Checking Off a Task

Select the task you want to check off, and then press Center 📋.

Organizing Your Tasks

In the Tasks list, select one of these options:

• All displays all your tasks.
- Date displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. You can select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due.
Category displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the Category pick list to select a different category.

Tip:

Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date.

Deleting a Task

1. Select the task you want to delete.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Delete Task on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.

Tip:

To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the Record menu, select Purge, and then select OK.

Customizing Tasks

The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of the Tasks list screen.

1. In the Tasks list screen, open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.

3. Set any of the following preferences:

4. Sort by indicates the order in which your tasks appear in the list.

5. Show Completed Tasks displays tasks that you've checked off.
6. Record Completion Date replaces the due date with the completion date when you check off a task.
7. Show Due Dates displays task due dates and inserts an exclamation point (!) next to overdue tasks.

238 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

■ Show Priorities displays the priority setting for each task.
■ Show Categories displays the category for each task.
- Alarm Sound sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.

4. Select OK.

Memos

Memos are a great way to store notes on your Treo device. Each memo can include 4,096 characters of text.

Creating a Memo

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select Memos

1. Enter the text that you want to appear in the memo. (Press Return to move down to new lines in the memo.)

2. Select Done.

Tip:

You can assign categories to your memos. Open the memo you want to change, select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select a category.

Deleting a Memo

1. Select the memo you want to delete.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Delete Memo on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.

240 Section 5A: Using Your Device's Organizer Features

Section 5B

Increasing Your Productivity

In This Section

Using the Documents Application to Work With Your Office Files
Voice Memo
World Clock
Calculator

Using the Documents Application to Work With Your Office Files

Tip:

The Palm Software Installation CD includes the Documents To Go® desktop software. On your device, the companion applications for Documents To Go is named Documents.

With the Documents application, you can take your important office information with you. You can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your device. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For example, you can open email attachments, files you download with the Web browser, and files stored on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a supported format.

Tip:

Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm Software Installation CD), you can use Documents To Go to transfer files to your device when you synchronize.

Note:

For complete information on the Documents To Go application, install it from the Palm Software Installation CD, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer, and then click Help; or go to www.dataviz.com.

Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:

• Send and receive email attachments in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
  •View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
• Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet on your device, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format.
• Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To Go desktop application to optimize the file for your device, and then sync the file onto your device. View or edit the file on your device, and then sync again to transfer the changes to the original PowerPoint file on your computer.

Note:

The Documents application does not support some editing functions, such as multiple font sizes and spell check.

Opening a Document

In the Documents application, you can open and view any Word, Excel, PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your device or on an expansion card that is inserted into the expansion card slot.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Documents 🎨.
2. Select the document you want from the list.

Tip:

When you are working on a file on your device, save it to your device or your expansion card by opening the menus, selecting Save As from the File menu, and then selecting the location where you want to save the file.

Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other important thoughts directly on your device.

Creating a Voice Memo

1. Press and hold the Side button on your device. Face your device and begin speaking.

Note:

Your recording pauses automatically when you receive a call. If you answer the call, recording stops and saves the voice memo. If you have not finished recording, rerecord your memo after hanging up from the call. If you ignore the call, press Record to resume recording.

1. After you finish recording, release the Side button. The memo is automatically saved to your device.
2. (Optional) Enter a title for the memo.

Tip:

Alternately, open the Voice Memo application, press the Side button to begin recording, and then press it again when you have finished recording. If you are recording a long voice memo, you can begin recording by opening Voice Memo and selecting New. Using this method, you can press and hold Center on the 5-way to pause recording, and release Center to resume recording.

Listening to a Voice Memo

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Voice Memo 🌿.
2. In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and then press Center to select it. The voice memo begins to play.

3. To set the volume level, press the Volume button on the side of your device or press Up ▲ or Down ▼ on the 5-way 📋.

4. Press Center ☐ to pause or stop playback.

Note:

To change a voice memo title, open the Voice Memo menu and select Rename Memo.

Tip:	You can send a voice memo in an email message (see “Attaching Voice Memos” on page 132). You can also use Bluetooth wireless technology to send a voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device (see “Sending Entries Over a Bluetooth® Wireless Connection” on page 261).

World Clock

World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe. Whether you're traveling or staying at home, it's easy to keep track of the best times to reach your business associates, friends, and family in faraway places.

Setting Cities

World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you selected the option to get the date and time from the mobile network (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 294), the Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network automatically updates the time display to match the local time when you travel.

Below the world map you can view the time in two other cities. If you travel a lot, you may want to select your home city as one of these two cities, so that you always know what time it is at home.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select World Clock 🔒.
2. Select a city pick list, and then select a city in the same time zone.

Adding Cities

If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it.

1. Select a city pick list, and then select Edit List.
2. Select Add.
3. Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and then select OK.

246 Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity

1. Enter the name of the city.
2. Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then select OK.
3. If the city is not on Daylight Saving Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight Saving Time is observed, enter Start and End dates.
4. Select OK.

Setting an Alarm

The next time you travel, don't rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that important meeting; use your device instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm feature that you can use as a travel alarm.

Tip:	Make sure the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.

1. Select Off in the upper-right corner.
2. Select the time you want the alarm to sound.
3. Select OK.

Tip:	To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the Options menu and select Alarm Preferences.

World Clock Tips

• Run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities.
• The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe.

Calculator

The Calculator application includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with scientific, financial, and conversion functions

Switching Between Basic and Advanced Calculator Modes

1. Go to Applications and select Calc
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.

Basic Mode Advanced Mode

Tip:

In Basic Mode, you can also press Right on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to cycle between functions, and press Left on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.

248 Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity

Selecting Functions in Advanced Calculator Mode

1. Switch to Advanced Calculator Mode (see the preceding procedure).
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select the function you want to use:

■ Math provides advanced mathematical functions such as exponents, roots, and logarithms.
- Trig provides trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
■ Finance provides financial calculator functions such as APR and amortization.
- Logic displays hexadecimal characters on the keypad, plus logic functions such as And, Not, Or, and Xor.
■ Statistics provides statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and random number generator.
- Weight/Temp provides weight and temperature conversions for metric and English values.
■ Length provides length conversions for metric and English values.
■ Area provides area conversions for metric, traditional, and English values.
■ Volume provides volume conversions for metric and English values.

1. Open the menus ☐.

2. Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float, Fixed (x), Sci (x), or Eng (x).

3. Open the menus

4. Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees, Radians, or Grads.

Tip:

To access a list of mathematical constants, such as Avogadro's number or the speed of light, select Con.

Storing and Recalling Numbers in Advanced Mode

To store a number in one of ten memory slots, select Sto.
To recall a stored number, select Rcl.

Managing Your Information and Settings

Sprint

Managing Files and Applications

In This Section

Using Find
- Installing Applications
◆ Removing Applications
- Viewing Application Information
Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
- Beaming Information
♦ Synchronizing Information—Advanced
Using Expansion Cards

Using Find

The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in some third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of characters you specify, including characters that are part of a word. Find is not case-sensitive, and it locates any word that begins with the text you enter. For example, entering plan finds planet but not airplane.

1. On any screen press Option + Shift/Find to open the Find dialog box.
2. Enter the text you want to find.
3. Select OK to start the search.
4. In the search results, select the text you want to review, or select Find More to continue the search.

Installing Applications

Your Treo™ 700p smart device comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install additional applications, such as business software, games, and more. The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications, and you can purchase other third-party Palm OS® applications as well. To learn about applications you can add to your device, go to www.palm.com/mytreo700pSprint.

The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your Treo device. Some Palm OS software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation that came with the software.

Installing Bonus Software From the CD

The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications that you can install on your device. You can install these applications when you install the desktop software, or you can install them later.

1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.
2. Click Install bonus software.
3. Click the name of the application you want to install.
4. Click Install (on the right side of the screen).
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.
6. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on your device.

Installing Applications From the Internet

You can use the Web browser on your device to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB) directly from the Internet. When you wirelessly download a PRC or PDB file, it is automatically installed on your device. If a file is compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you need to download it to your computer and expand the file before installing it on your device.

1. Open the Web browser (see "Viewing a Web Page" on page 160).
2. Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download.
3. Press Left ◀ or Right ▶ to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center to initiate the download process.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application.

Installing Applications From a Computer

To install an application from a computer, you must first install Palm ^® Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700 smart device.

When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on your computer, such as WinZip or Allume StuffIt Expander, before you install the application on your device.

1. On a Windows computer, drag and drop the application file(s) onto the Palm™ Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.

On a Mac computer, drag and drop the application file(s) onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.

1. Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK.
2. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on your device.

Tip:

You can open a window that lets you select whether to install files on your device or on an expansion card. On a Windows computer, double-click the Palm Quick Install icon. On a Mac computer, open the HotSync menu and select Install Handheld files.

Getting Help With Third-Party Applications

If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error message), contact the application's author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications, see "Third-Party Applications" on page 347.

Removing Applications

If you decide that you no longer need an application or you want to free up memory, you can remove applications from your device or from an expansion card. You can remove only applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in applications that reside in the ROM portion of your Treo device. These applications appear with a lock icon next to them.

1. Go to Applications

2. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the card into your device.

3. Open the menus ☐.

4. Select Delete on the App menu.

5. Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the application you want to remove: Phone or Card.

6. Select the application that you want to remove.

7. Select Delete.

8. Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup folder on your computer.

Tip:

Applications deleted from your device are kept on your computer in the Archive folder of your user folder. If you're having trouble locating your user folder, see "I Can't Find My User Folder" on page 322.

258 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Manually Deleting Applications From Your Computer

If an application you delete reappears on your device, you may need to manually delete it from your computer.

1. Locate your Backup folder on your computer.

Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\.
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\.
- If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your backup folder may be located in the palmOne or Handspring folder.

1. If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the file from the Backup folder.

2. Delete the file from your device again.

Viewing Application Information

The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your Treo device.

1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Info on the App menu.

4. At the bottom of the screen, select the type of information you want to view:

5. Version displays the version numbers of your applications.

6. Size displays the size (in kilobytes) of your applications and information.

7. Records displays the number of entries in your applications.

8. Scroll to the application you want to see information about.

9. Select Done.

Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Sending Entries Over a Bluetooth® Wireless Connection

In most applications you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the Business category.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Bluetooth 🌿.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Go to Applications 🔒 and open the application containing the information you want to send.
4. Select the entry or category you want to send.
5. Open the menus
6. Select Send from the leftmost menu.
7. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
8. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.

Sending an Application Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Bluetooth 🔒.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Go to Applications

Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications 261

1. Open the menus

2. Select Send from the App menu.

3. Select the Send From pick list and select whether the application you want to send is located on your device or on an expansion card.

4. Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that has a lock 📋ext to it.

5. Select Send.

6. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.

7. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.

Receiving Information Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Bluetooth 🔒.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:

- Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device. Your device remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off.

- Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device during the next two minutes. Your device reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

262 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

1. Use the other device to discover your Treo device and send information to it:

2. See the other device's documentation to learn how to discover and send information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.
   If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound On 🔊 position, your Treo device beeps to notify you of the connection and then prompts you to accept the information. Select a category or expansion card to file the item. If you don’t select a category, the item goes into the Unfiled category.

3. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.

Tip:

As a security measure, your Treo device does not accept any information unless you select Yes to receive the information. To protect your information, do not accept any information from an unknown sender.

Beaming Information

Your Treo 700 _P smart device is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that enables you to beam information to another Palm OS device with an IR port. The IR port is located on the top of your device, between the Ringer switch and the antenna, behind the small dark shield.

For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and both devices must be kept stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight.

Tip:

If you beam a bookmark or a saved page from the Web browser, it beams the URL, not the contents of that page.

Beaming an Entry

You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the Business or Family category.

1. Select the entry or category you want to beam. (You cannot beam an item that has a lock next to it.)
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select one of the following on the Record menu:

- Beam sends an individual entry.

- Beam Category sends all entries in the current category.

1. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo device directly at the IR port of the receiving device.

Line drawing of two mobile phones with wireless signal waves from each, no text or symbols present

Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications 265

1. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo device.

Tip: You can beam your business card. From the Main view in the Phone application, open the menus, and then press M.

Beaming an Application

Not all applications can be beamed. A lock icon 📄 appears on the Beam screen next to applications that cannot be beamed.

1. Go to Applications 📄.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Beam on the App menu.
4. Select the Beam From pick list and select whether the application you want to beam is located on your Treo device or on an expansion card.
5. Select the application you want to transfer, and then select Beam.
6. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo device directly at the IR port of the receiving device.
7. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo device.

Note: Please note that there may be restrictions that prevent you from transferring copies of an application to a third party. It is your responsibility to ensure that you have obtained the legal right to provide a copy to the third party and to honor any restrictions imposed by the software licensors.

266 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Receiving Beamed Information

1. Turn on your screen.
2. Select the beam command on the transmitting device.
3. Point the IR port on your Treo device directly at the IR port of the transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box.
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category or expansion card. (If you don't select a category, the item goes in the Unfiled category.)
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.

Synchronizing Information—Advanced

Changing Which Applications Sync

By default, information from Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks is updated each time you synchronize your device with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. You can change which applications synchronize. For example, if you don't use the Memos application and you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos.

Tip:

Windows If you set up your device to sync with Outlook, see the online Outlook synchronization Help to learn how to change which applications synchronize. Click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select Custom to view the list of applications that sync with Outlook.

On a Windows computer:

1. Click the HotSync manager icon Ⓧ in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen.
2. Select Custom.
3. Select your device name from the drop-down list at the top of the screen.
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Change.
5. Do one of the following:

- Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.

268 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

- Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use that application).

Tip:

Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in one location (device or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that application. For example, if the Calendar information on your device is accurate but the information on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites desktop for the Calendar application to have your device information replace your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your device and “desktop” refers to your computer.

1. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off.

2. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as default box. If you do not check this box, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting for that application.

3. Click OK, and then click Done.

On a Mac computer:

1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
3. From the User pop-up menu, select your device name.
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Conduit Settings.
5. Do one of the following:

- Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.

- Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use that application).

270 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Tip:

Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in one location (device or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that application. For example, if the Calendar information on your device is accurate but the information on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar application to have your device information replace your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your device.

1. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off.
2. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. If you do not select this button, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting for the application.
3. Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings screen.

Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection for Synchronization

If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection. When you synchronize using your device's Bluetooth wireless feature, you don't need your cable. This is especially useful if you travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Bluetooth 🔒.

2. Select On.

3. Enter a device name for your Treo device. This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth device's screen when it connects to your Treo device.

4. Select Setup Devices.

5. Select HotSync Setup.

6. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership between your Treo device and your computer. In some cases you may need to perform setup steps on your computer before you can complete this step. Check your computer's documentation for specific setup instructions.

7. After you finish the HotSync Setup, select Done to return to Applications view.

You're now ready to sync your Treo device with your Bluetooth computer.

272 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Synchronizing Over a Bluetooth Connection

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select HotSync 🔒.

2. Select Local.

3. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select the name of the PC you set up for Bluetooth synchronization (see "Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection for Synchronization" on page 271).

4. Select the HotSync icon 📊 on your device.

When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.

Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection

When you synchronize using your device's IR port, you don't need your cable. This is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.

Your computer must include the following:

- Your computer must have an enabled IR port and driver, or an IR device that is attached to it. Check your computer's documentation to see if the computer supports IR communication.

- HotSync manager must be active. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon 🔍 appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.

On a Windows computer:

1. On your computer, click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure that Infrared is selected.
2. On your device, go to Applications and select HotSync.
3. Select Local.
4. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches of the IR port of your computer.
6. Select the HotSync icon 📋 on your device.

When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.

On a Mac computer:

1. Double-click the HotSync manager icon 📋 in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
3. Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next to IR port.
4. Close the HotSync Software Setup screen.
5. On your device, go to Applications and select HotSync
6. Select Local.

274 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

1. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
2. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches of the IR port of your computer.
3. Select the HotSync icon 📋 on your device.

When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.

Note:

If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your email, contacts, and calendar information synchronize directly with your company's Exchange server. This information synchronizes wirelessly with the server; it is not updated when you synchronize directly with your computer. See “Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on page 141. Your tasks and memos continue to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook, depending on which desktop application you use.

Using Expansion Cards

The expansion slot on your Treo device enables you to add SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of your device. For example, SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards can store the following:

Pictures
•MP3 audio files
- Email attachments
Games
eBooks
• Microsoft Office files
Adobe Acrobat files
Applications
Databases

Your Treo device is also compatible with SDIO cards, which let you add accessories, such as a presentation module, to your device.

Although expansion cards are sold separately, your device includes a dummy, nonfunctional card inside the expansion slot to keep out dust and other debris. When you're not using an expansion card, reinsert the dummy card to keep the expansion card slot clean.

Tip:

SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard cards for reading and writing information.

276 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Inserting and Removing Expansion Cards

If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound On 🔊 position, you hear a confirmation tone when you insert or remove an expansion card.

1. Press down and release the dummy card.
2. After you feel the expansion slot eject the dummy card, remove the card from the expansion slot.

1. Hold your device with the screen facing you, and hold the card with the label facing you. (The notch on the card should be in the lower-left corner next to the antenna.)

2. Insert the card into the expansion slot until you feel the card lock into place.

278 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Opening Applications on an Expansion Card

After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card.

1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion slot. Applications view automatically appears.

2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.

3. Press Center 📋 to open the application.

Accessing Items Stored on an Expansion Card

When an expansion card contains items such as pictures or songs, you can access those items directly from the card.

1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Applications view automatically appears.
2. Select the category pick list in the title bar, and then select All.
3. Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For example, to view a picture, select Pics&Videos.

Tip:

Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

Copying Applications Between an Expansion Card and Your Device

You can copy applications between your Treo device and your expansion card.

Tip:	Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible with Palm OS software version 5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to store files in a location that is separate from the application.

1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came with your card.)

2. Go to Applications

3. Open the menus ☐.

4. Select Copy on the App menu.

5. Select the Copy To pick list and select the destination: or Phone.

6. Select the From pick list and select the location of the application you want to copy: or Phone.

7. Highlight the application you want to copy.

8. Select Copy.

Tip:	You can install an application directly to an expansion card instead of copying it from your device’s main memory. See “Installing Applications” on page 255 for details.

280 Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications

Viewing Expansion Card Information

The Card Info application displays general information about the expansion card that is currently in the expansion slot, and it enables you to rename and format a card.

- Go to Applications 📋 and select Card Info 🎨.

Renaming an Expansion Card

If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the card to better match its contents.

1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came with your card.)
2. Insert the expansion card into the expansion slot. Applications view automatically appears.
3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.
4. Select Card Info
5. Open the menus ☐.
6. Select Rename Card on the Card menu.
7. Enter a new name for the card.
8. Select OK.

Formatting an Expansion Card

Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer. When you format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the card and return it to a blank state.

1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came with your card.)
2. Insert the card into the expansion slot. Applications view automatically appears.

3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.

4. Select Card Info

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Format Card on the Card menu.
3. Enter a new name for the card.
4. Select OK.

Section 6B

Customizing Your Device

In This Section

Setting System Sounds
Adjusting the Display and Appearance
- Changing the Applications Settings
- Customizing Device Buttons
Setting the Date and Time
♦ Optimizing Power Settings
♦ Locking Your Device and Information
◆ Using Connection Settings
♦ Purchasing Accessories for Your Device

Setting System Sounds

Silencing Sounds

You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. This does not, however, mute the audio during a phone call.

1. Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off ✗ position. Your device vibrates once to let you know that you've turned sounds off.
2. To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to the Sound On position.

When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On 🔊 position, it restores the previous sound settings.

Tip:

Your device includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For information on setting the vibrate option, see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that describe the individual applications.

284 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Setting System Volume Levels

You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when you synchronize.

Tip:	If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound Off position, the ringer setting overrides the sound settings and all sounds are turned off.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Sounds
2. Select the Application pick list, and then select System.
3. Select the System Volume and Game Volume pick lists, and then select the volume levels.
4. Select Done.

Adjusting the Display and Appearance

Adjusting the Brightness

Depending on the lighting conditions in which you're using your device, you may need to adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight.

1. Press Option Ⓞ, and then press Backlight Ⓟ.

1. Press Left ◀ and Right ▶ to adjust the brightness.

2. Select Done.

Tip:

To automatically set the brightness to the low setting, press Option, and then press Menu.

286 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Changing the Screen Font

You can change the screen font in Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Sprint PCS PictureMail®, Tasks, and the Web browser. The font styles may vary between applications, and some applications may offer fewer choices.

1. Open the application in which you want to change the font.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Font.
4. Select a font style. (In the Web browser, select the Font size pick list and select Large or Small.)
5. Select OK.

Tip:

You can also change the text size in the VersaMail® application. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application.

Setting Display Formats

Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on geographic regions. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. Many of the built-in applications on your Treo™ 700p smart device use the Formats Preferences settings.

1. Go to Applications and select Prefs

1. Select Formats.
2. Set any of the following preferences:

- Preset to sets the standard number conventions for your country. When you select a country, the other Formats Preferences are automatically set to that country's conventions. You can also edit each option individually.

• Time sets the time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock.
  Date sets the date format.
• Week starts sets the first day of the week (usually Sunday or Monday).

• Numbers sets the format for numbers with decimal points and commas.

• Select Done.

Aligning the Screen

Occasionally, your device screen may need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can realign the screen any time.

1. Go to Applications and select Prefs
2. Select Touchscreen.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to tap the screen where indicated.
4. Select Done.

Changing the System Color Scheme

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Color Theme.
3. Select a color scheme from the list.
4. Select Done.

Tip:	You can also set the wallpaper for the Main view in the Phone application (see “Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application” on page 92) and the background for Agenda view in Calendar (see “Customizing Display Options for Your Calendar” on page 231).

Changing the Applications Settings

You can change the Applications settings on your device so that you can easily access the applications you use most often. You can arrange and display your applications by category, reassign the buttons on your device, and select default applications for specific tasks.

Arranging Applications by Category

You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of applications in Applications view.

1. Go to Applications 📄.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Category on the App menu.
4. Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.
5. Select Done.

Tip:

To create a new category, select the category pick list and select Edit Categories. Select New, and then enter the category name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and then select OK again.

Displaying Applications by Category

Do one of the following:

• Press Applications 📂 repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.
• Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select the category you want to display. Select All to display all of your applications.

Selecting the Applications Display

By default, Applications view displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful when you have so many applications in a category that the applications fill up more than one screen.

1. Go to Applications 📄.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Select the View By pick list, and then select List.
5. Select OK.

Customizing Device Buttons

Reassigning Buttons

With Buttons Preferences you can select which applications are associated with the quick buttons and the Side button on your device. You can assign a primary and secondary application to each of the three quick buttons that open an application.

Tip:

We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your device. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to the original button settings.

1. Go to Applications 📄 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Buttons.
3. Select the pick list next to the icon of the button you want to reassign, or select the Option + Button combination you want to reassign, or select the Press + Hold Side button pick list, and then select an application.
4. Select Done.

Tip:

You can also selectHotSync to choose an application to open with the sync button on the sync cable. To restore all of the buttons and key combinations to their factory settings, select Default.

292 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Changing Default Applications

Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information (for example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in an email message). Your device comes with a set of predefined applications to handle email, messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you have more than one application to handle these requests on your device, you can specify which application you want to use for each function.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Default apps.
3. Select each pick list, and then select the application you want to associate with that function.
4. Select Done.

Setting the Date and Time

By default, your device synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with the Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network when your device is on and you are inside a coverage area. Date & Time Preferences let you manually set the date, time, and time zone for your device.

Note:

You can also add time zones to events you create in Calendar. See "Creating an Event" on page 226 for information.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Date & Time.
3. To manually set the date and time, uncheck the Get date & time from mobile network box. Select the Date field and select the date, and then select the Time field and select the time.
4. To manually set the time zone, uncheck the Get time zone from mobile network box. If you uncheck the Get date & time box, the Get time zone box is unchecked by default. Select the Set Location pick list, and then select a city in your time zone.

Note:

If you uncheck the Get date & time box, the Get time zone box is disabled and you cannot have the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network automatically set the time zone. However, you can choose to have the network set the date and time while you manually set the time zone.

294 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Note:

If a city in the same time zone is not on the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. If necessary, modify any of the settings in the Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.

1. Select OK, and then select Done.

Optimizing Power Settings

Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize your device's battery performance.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📁.
2. Select Power.

3. Set any of the following preferences:

4. Brightness sets the intensity of the screen and keyboard backlights. Drag the slider or press Left ◀ and Right ▶ to adjust the brightness level.

5. Auto-off after indicates how long your screen stays on during a period of inactivity. When there is no interaction with the keyboard or screen for the specified time period, your screen turns off automatically.

6. On a call, dim backlight after indicates how long the backlight stays on at normal intensity during a phone call. After the specified time period, the backlight dims to conserve power during a long phone call.

7. Beam Receive indicates whether your Treo device is ready to receive information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option off, you must return to this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to receive beamed information.

8. Select Done.

Locking Your Device and Information

Your Treo device includes several features that help protect your device from inadvertent use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the following features on your device:

• Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard and all buttons in case they are accidentally pressed in your bag or pocket.
  Screen: You can disable the screen's touch-sensitive feature during an active call or call alert.
• Phone (Phone Lock): You can use the Phone Lock features to set your phone to require a password before a call is made. The built-in security software lets you call emergency services even if your phone is locked.
• Device: You can set your device to require a password for you to see any information on the device.
• Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your device to require a password for viewing them.

Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)

The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so buttons aren't accidentally pressed or items on the screen aren't activated while your device is in a pocket or bag.

By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your device.

To turn off Keyguard, do the following:

1. If the screen is off, press Power/End 📋 to wake up the screen.
2. Press Center ☐ to turn off Keyguard.

To turn on Keyguard, press Option ⏻ and then press Power/End ⏱.

You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable the feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the following:

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Keyguard.
3. Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the following:

- Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power is turned off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30 seconds after power off.

- Select Disabled to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn it on again.

1. Select Done.

Note:

If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn Keyguard on manually by pressing Option + Power/End when the screen is on. If you use this method, Keyguard stays on only until you press Center to turn it off; it does not come back on. To permanently re-enable Keyguard, follow the preceding procedure and select one of the options from the Auto-Keyguard list.

298 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Locking Your Screen

You can set your device to automatically lock the screen's touch-sensitive features in certain situations.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Keyguard.
3. Check one or both of the following boxes:

- Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone rings. You must use the 5-way 📋 to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or press Talk 📋 to answer the call or Power/End 📋 to ignore the call.

- On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the 5-way to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you're holding your device near your ear to speak.

1. Select Done.

Locking Your Phone (Phone Lock)

You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless features. When your phone is locked, you must enter the correct code to unlock it. You can still call emergency services when your phone is locked, however.

1. Press Phone
2. Open the menus

1. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.

2. (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up to three numbers that you can dial when your phone is locked, and then select OK. You do not need to enter 911 as one of the three numbers, because this number is always available.

3. Select one of the following Phone Lock options:

4. On phone power off locks your phone each time you turn it off. When this setting is active, you must enter your lock code each time you turn your phone on again.

5. Immediately locks your phone when you select OK. The next time you dial a number, you must enter your lock code to unlock your phone. After that, you can continue to make calls without entering your lock code, unless you select one of the phone lock options.

6. When prompted, enter the lock code, and then select OK. (Unless you changed your lock code, it is the last four digits of your phone number.)

7. If you want to change the lock code, select Change Lock Code, enter a new lock code, and then select OK. Repeat this step to verify the new lock code.
8. Select OK. If you selected Immediately in step 5, your phone locks right away. If you selected On phone power off, your phone locks the next time you press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone.

To disable the current Phone Lock settings:

1. Press Phone

1. Open the menus ☐.
2. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.
3. Uncheck the On phone power off box and enter your lock code to change this setting.
4. Select OK twice.

300 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Locking Your Device

To protect your personal information, you can lock the device so that you need to enter your password to access any of your information or use any features of your device, including the phone. You can still call emergency services when your device is locked.

Important:

If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your device (see “Hard Reset” on page 315). Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your device. However, you can restore all previously synchronized information the next time you synchronize your device with your computer (see “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33).

1. Go to Applications 🔒 and select Security 🔒.
2. Select the Password box.
3. Assign a password and a password hint.
4. Select the Auto Lock Device box.
5. When prompted, enter your password, and then select OK.

1. Select one of the following options:

2. Never prevents your device from locking automatically. You can still lock your system manually by selecting Lock & Turn Off and then selecting Off & Lock.
   On power off locks your device when you turn off the screen, or when it shuts off with the Auto-off feature.

3. At a preset time locks your device at a specific time of day.

4. After a preset delay locks your device after a period of inactivity.

5. Select OK.

6. Do one of the following:

7. Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your device immediately.

8. Press Applications 🔒 to accept your settings and continue using your device.

Working With Private Entries

In most applications, you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have two Security setting options:

• Hide Records prevents private entries from appearing anywhere in the application.
• Mask Records replaces private entries with a visual placeholder where the entry would normally appear.

302 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

After you enable the mask or hide settings, any entries marked as private are immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private entries. If you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a password.

1. Display the entry that you want to mark private.
2. Select Details.
3. Check the Private box.
4. Select OK.

Hiding or Masking All Private Entries

1. Make sure the entries you want to hide or mask are marked private, as described in the preceding procedure.
2. Go to Applications 📋 and select Security 🔒.
3. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select either Hide Records or Mask Records.
4. If prompted for your password, enter it and select OK.

Viewing All Private Entries

You can reveal all of the entries you've hidden or masked.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Security 🔒.
2. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.
3. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.

Viewing Private Entries in a Specific Application

1. Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Options, and then select Security.
4. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.
5. Select OK.
6. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.

Security and Palm® Desktop Software (Windows)

The Windows version of Palm® Desktop software observes the security password for your Treo device. If you forget your password, you cannot view your information in Palm Desktop. If your device is unlocked, you can change your password on your device, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private entries the next time you sync.

Follow these steps to recover a lost password:

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Security
2. Select the Password box.
3. Select the Lost Password box.
4. Select Yes.

Entering Owner Information

You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate with your Treo device, such as your name, company name, and home phone number. If you lock your device (see “Locking Your Device” on page 301), the Owner Preferences information appears on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must also enter your password to change the Owner Preferences information.

1. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📋.
2. Select Owner.
3. If you assigned a password with the Security application, select Unlock, enter your password, and then select OK.
4. Enter the text that you want to appear on the Owner Preferences screen.
5. Select Done.

Using Connection Settings

Connecting to a Virtual Private Network

If you want to use your Treo device to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company's firewall (security layer). You need a VPN on your device if your device and your company's server are located on opposite sides of the firewall.

Check with your company's system administrator to see if a VPN is required for accessing the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN client on your device to use this feature.

Note:

For information about third-party VPN client software, see the Palm Software Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/mytreo700pSprint.

1. Install your third-party VPN client. See “Installing Applications” on page 255 for details.
2. Go to Applications 📋 and select Prefs 📁.
3. Select VPN.
4. Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.

Purchasing Accessories for Your Device

These and other accessories are available from your local Sprint Store or at www.palm.com. For more information, you can also call the Sprint PCS® Accessory Hotline at 800-974-2221 or visit www.sprint.com. Next day delivery is available in select areas.

- Vehicle Power Charger

Charges your device in your vehicle using the car lighter socket.

- Replacement Battery

Serves as a backup battery if your primary battery becomes drained, is charging, or has reached the end of its useful life.

•USB Sync Cable

Provides an extra cable (your device comes with one USB sync cable).

•USB Docking Cradle

Provides a convenient and elegant desktop solution for synchronizing information, charging your device with any USB-enabled PC or Mac computer, and charging a second battery.

Extra AC Charger

Provides an extra 100 - 240 volt AC charger for your device.

• International Travel Adapters

Provides snap-on adapters for continental Europe, the United Kingdom, and Australia. For use with the Extra AC Charger only.

●Leather Side Case With Belt Clip

Clips to your belt or bag for quick access and protection for your device.

Stylus

Provides a replacement or spare stylus for your device.

308 Section 6B: Customizing Your Device

Resources

Sprint

Section 7A

Help

In This Section

Trouble Upgrading?
- Resetting Your Treo 700 P Smart Device
♦ Replacing the Battery
Troubleshooting
Making Room on Your Treo 700 P Smart Device
Third-Party Applications
Errors
Where to Learn More

Section 7A: Help 311

Trouble Upgrading?

If you experience problems with your Treo™ 700p smart device after performing the upgrade steps described in “Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device” on page 27, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not quarantined during the installation process. These files reside in the Backup subfolder of your user folder. Incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues, including system resets and freezes. If you experience problems after upgrading, follow these steps to correct the problem:

1. Locate your user folder on your computer:

- Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name, followed by the first letter of the first word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

■ Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location:

: Users: : Documents: Palm: Users.

1. Make a copy of your user folder and store it in a safe place.

- Windows: Copy the folder, and then paste it to your Windows desktop.

312 Section 7A: Help

- Mac: Select the folder, press and hold the Option key, and then drag the folder to your Mac desktop.

1. Confirm that the copy of your user folder includes a subfolder named Backup, and that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the Backup subfolder.
2. Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder.
3. Perform a hard reset on your device. See “Resetting Your Treo 700P Smart Device” on page 314 for instructions.
4. Sync your Treo 700 _P smart device with your new desktop software; be sure to select your existing device name from the User list.
5. Reinstall third-party applications from the copy of your Backup subfolder (see “Installing Applications” on page 255 for instructions). We recommend that you install one application at a time to help you identify the application that caused the problem. We also recommend that you do not install any applications that do any of the following:

■ Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID.
- Replace organizer applications, such as Contacts or Calendar.
- Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data connections.
■Provide Web-clipping applications or files, such as PQA files.
■Provide instant messaging features.

If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the third-party developer for software updates and information about compatibility with your Treo 700 _P smart device.

Resetting Your Treo 700 _P Smart Device

Soft Reset

Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your Treo 700p smart device is not responding or you're having trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help. All your information is retained when you perform a soft reset.

1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your Treo 700p smart device.
2. Use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your Treo 700 _P smart device.

Diagram of a mobile phone casing with two arrows indicating directional movement (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a mobile phone with a stylus inserted, showing front panel and screen (no text or symbols)

314 Section 7A: Help

System Reset

A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, can be useful if your device loops or freezes during a soft reset. Performing a system reset allows you to get out of the loop and restores limited functionality to your device in order to uninstall a third-party application that's causing the problem. Note that after a system reset, you must perform a soft reset to restore full functionality, including the wireless features, to your device.

1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your Treo 700 smart device.
2. While pressing and holding Up ▲ on the 5-way navigator 📋, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your device.
3. When the logo screen appears, release Up ▲.
4. Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem.
5. Perform a soft reset.

Hard Reset

A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your Treo 700 _P smart device. Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft and a system reset. You can restore previously synchronized information the next time you synchronize.

Note:

Your device might not re-establish a Sprint PCS Vision® session after a hard reset. To manually establish a new Sprint PCS Vision session, open the Web browser to access a Web site.

A hard reset can tell you if a problem stems from your Treo 700 smart device or from an application installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the problem is related to software you installed. See “Third-Party Applications” on page 347 for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues.

Note:

Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in these applications and you will need to reinstall these applications after the hard reset. Please contact the developer to find out which information is backed up during synchronization.

1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your Treo 700p smart device.
2. While pressing and holding Power/End 📋, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your Treo 700p smart device.
3. Continue pressing and holding Power/End 📋. When the logo screen appears, release Power/End 📋
4. When the "Erase all data?" prompt appears, press Up ▲ to confirm the hard reset.

Note:

If you do not see the “Erase all data?” message, the hard reset was not performed. Please retry the above steps, making sure to hold Power/End until the logo screen appears.

Replacing the Battery

Your Treo 700 _P smart device comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a battery that is approved by Sprint and that is compatible with your device. Failure to use the proper battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product damage, and it will void your device warranty.

1. Press Power/End to turn off the screen.
2. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your Treo 700 smart device.
3. Place a finger in the notch next to the battery and lift the battery up at a 45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment.

1. Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment.

2. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, pressing it into place. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks into place.

3. Connect your device to the charger or sync cable.
4. Wait for your Treo 700 _P smart device to turn on, and then enable the network time or set the date and time when prompted.

Desktop Software Installation

If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the wrong version of the software or some of your computer's resources may be unavailable. Follow these steps to retry the installation:

Note:

The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that enables you to synchronize using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If you want to synchronize using a different personal information manager (PIM), you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM's author or vendor to learn whether desktop software is available for your new Treo device.

1. Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator.
2. Restart your computer.
3. Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications.
4. Make sure you're installing the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your new Treo 700 smart device. (Other versions of the desktop software may not work with this device.)
5. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.

Important:

Always use the same language for your Treo device, your operating system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language setups.

Screen

The Screen Appears Blank

1. When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen dims automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may appear blank when this occurs. Press any key except Power/End 📋 to restore the screen to normal brightness. (Pressing Power/End 📋 hangs up the call.)
2. When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen turns off. Press and release Power/End 📄 to wake up the screen.
3. Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the screen brightness (see “Adjusting the Brightness” on page 286).
4. If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see "Soft Reset" on page 314).
5. If the problem persists, connect the Treo 700 _P smart device to the AC charger (see “Charging the Battery” on page 13) and perform a soft reset again.
6. If that doesn't work, perform a hard reset (see "Hard Reset" on page 315).

The Screen Doesn't Respond Accurately to Taps or It Activates Wrong Features

1. Go to Applications 📋 and use the 5-way 🔍 to select Prefs 📋.
2. Use the 5-way 📋 to select Touchscreen.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.
4. Select Done.
5. If the problem persists, check for material trapped between the screen and the edge of the device.
6. If you're using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly installed.

There's a Blinking Bell at the Upper-Left Corner of the Screen

The blinking bell 🔒 in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert Manager symbol. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven't acknowledged.

1. Press and hold Center 📋 or tap the Alert Manager symbol 🔒 with your stylus.
2. When the list of pending alerts appears, do either of the following:

- Select the alert text to view the item and keep it in the list.

- Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then select Done.

Synchronization

Synchronization backs up the information from your device onto your computer and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase

Section 7A: Help 321

all your information on your device, you can synchronize your device with your computer to restore the information. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm® Desktop software information is damaged, you can recover your information by synchronizing with your device. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your information, synchronize frequently.

This section describes synchronization between your Treo device and a desktop computer running Palm Desktop software. You can also synchronize the information on your device using third-party applications. See the separate documentation for other applications for information on features and configuration.

Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you've installed the desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD.

I Can't Find My User Folder

Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name followed by the first letter of the first word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location: : Users : : Documents : Palm : Users.

Palm Desktop Software Does Not Respond to a Synchronization Attempt

1. Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on your computer and on the bottom of your device (see “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32).
2. Make sure that HotSync manager is running:

- Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager icon 🎨 in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen and make sure Local USB is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync manager icon 🎨, click Start, select Programs, select Palm, and then select HotSync Manager.

- Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click the HotSync manager icon 📋 in the Palm folder. In the Connection Settings panel, set Local Setup Port to Palm USB.

1. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps.
2. Perform a soft reset (see "Soft Reset" on page 314).
3. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps.

4. If problems persist and you're synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the sync cable to a different USB port, or directly to your computer's built-in USB port.

5. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps.

6. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.

Note:

Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.

1. Reboot your computer.
2. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device.

Synchronization Starts But Stops Without Finishing

If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS ^® device or received a system error, such as Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your device.

1. Locate your Backup folder and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that "Palm" in the following locations might be "Handspring" or "palmOne," based on the device you're upgrading from:

Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\
■ Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\

1. Synchronize.
2. Manually reinstall any third-party applications you want on your device. If necessary, use the items in the old Backup folder you renamed.

324 Section 7A: Help

1. (Windows only) If the Windows New Hardware Wizard appears, the synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard completes its job. Follow all instructions in the New Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
2. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.

Note:

Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.

1. Reboot your computer.
2. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device.

Tip:

The HotSync Log can tell you when and why synchronization stopped. Right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select View Log.

Synchronization Finishes But Information Does Not Appear Where It Should

1. Make sure you're synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). The Palm Software Installation CD enables you to choose whether you want to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. Reinsert the installation CD and select "Change your synchronization method" if necessary. If you use a different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more information, consult the company that makes the PIM.

2. If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make sure you are synchronizing with the correct device name. If information is not appearing in Palm Desktop, make sure the correct device name is selected in the User list on the toolbar of Palm Desktop.

3. Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary conduits are set to Synchronize the files.
4. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.

Note:

Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.

1. Reboot your computer.
2. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device.
3. If you're using Microsoft Outlook, consider the following:

- With the included software, you can synchronize your Treo 700 _P smart device with the Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Notes folders on your computer. If you want to synchronize your information with a global Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses, and then select Add to Personal Address Book).

- Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software. You may want to use a third-party solution instead.

326 Section 7A: Help

If you're trying to synchronize offline, be sure to set your Outlook Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.

Tip:

For more information on Outlook conduits, click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar, select Custom, select an application with Outlook in its name, and then select Help.

I Have Duplicate Entries in Microsoft Outlook After I Synchronize

1. Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.
2. On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and manually enter any information you've added to your device since the last time you synchronized.
3. Click the HotSync manager icon 📋 in the taskbar, and select Custom.
4. Select an application that has duplicate entries that also has Outlook in its name.
5. Click Change.
6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
7. If more than one application has duplicate entries, then repeat steps 4 through 6 for each application with duplicates.
8. Click Done.
9. Synchronize your device and your computer.

My Appointments Show Up in the Wrong Time Slot After I Sync

If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (for example, your desktop was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your device after you sync. To be safe, enable local network time (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 294) and avoid assigning time zones to your appointments (see “Creating an Event” on page 226).

If you're using Microsoft Outlook:

1. Make sure that you installed the Microsoft Outlook conduit that came with your Treo 700p smart device. If you're not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall it.
2. Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.
3. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to your device since the last time you synchronized.
4. Click the HotSync manager icon 📋 in the taskbar, and select Custom.
5. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.
6. Click Change.
7. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
8. Synchronize your device and your computer.
9. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box.
10. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.

If you're using Palm Desktop software:

1. On your device, press Calendar 📷.
2. Open the menus ☑.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Uncheck the New events use time zones box (if it's checked).
5. On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong entries.
6. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to your device since the last time you synchronized.
7. Click the HotSync manager icon 📋 in the taskbar, and select Custom.
8. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.
9. Click Change.
10. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
11. Synchronize your device and your computer.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box.
13. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.

To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events. Palm Desktop software does not support time zones.

Phone

Signal Strength Is Weak

Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play. Then you will know when to expect signal strength issues.

• If you're standing, move about 10 feet in any direction.
• In a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.
• In a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.
  ●Outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
• In a vehicle, move your Treo device so that it's level with a window.

My Treo Device Won't Connect to the Mobile Network

• Try the suggestions in the preceding section for weak signals.
• Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
• Perform a soft reset (see "Soft Reset" on page 314).
• If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device's phone as a modem), terminate the session (see “Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem” on page 118 or “Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem” on page 173).

The Other Person Hears an Echo

- Try decreasing the volume on your Treo device to avoid coupling or feedback on the other person's end. This applies to both the speakerphone and the earpiece.

• Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back into the microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the bottom right side of the phone.
• If you're using the speakerphone feature with your device lying on a flat surface, try turning the device face down (screen facing the surface).

I Hear My Own Voice Echo

Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.

My Voice Is Too Quiet on the Other End

• Be sure to position the bottom of the Treo device, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth.
• Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with better coverage.

I Hear Static or Interference

Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with better coverage.

If you're using a hands-free device enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology, try the following:

• Move your Treo device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your Treo device and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a hands-free device varies among manufacturers.

- Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Treo device and your hands-free device. For example, move your Treo device to the same side of your body as your hands-free device.

My Device Hangs Up When I Hold It to My Ear

You may be accidentally pressing the onscreen Hang Up All button with your cheek. Try holding the device so that your face doesn't press against the screen. If this is not convenient, you may want to disable the screen's touch-sensitive feature during active calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).

My Device Seems to Turn Off by Itself

If a system error and reset occur, the Treo device automatically turns the phone on if it was on before the reset. However, if the device can't determine if your phone was on before the reset, the phone does not automatically turn on (see "Turning Your Device's Phone On and Off" on page 55). If the problem persists and you're using third-party applications, see "Third-Party Applications" on page 347 for additional suggestions.

My Device Makes or Answers Calls When It's in a Bag or Pocket

Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press

Power/End 📋 to turn off the screen before placing it in your briefcase or pocket. You may also want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during incoming calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).

If you are using a Bluetooth hands-free device with your Treo device, you may have turned the auto-answer feature on in Handsfree Preferences. For information, see “Setting Up Your Hands-Free Device to Automatically Answer Calls” on page 87.

Hands-Free Devices

I Can't Make or Receive Calls Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device

Confirm all of the following:

The device with Bluetooth® wireless technology is compatible with your Treo device. Go to http://www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html for a list of compatible devices.
- Go to Applications 📁 and select Bluetooth ⚙. Make sure the Bluetooth setting is turned on in the Bluetooth application.
- You have already formed a partnership between your Treo device and your hands-free device, and the hands-free device appears in the Trusted Devices list (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device” on page 84).
- Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.
- Your Treo device is within range of the hands-free device.

Note:

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range can be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

I Hear Static or Interference When Using My Hands-Free Device

• Try moving your Treo device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your Treo device and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a hands-free device varies among manufacturers.
• Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Treo device and your hands-free device.

Some Features of My Hands-Free Device Don't Work With My Treo Device

• Check the Palm compatibility list at http://www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html to ensure that your device is compatible.
• Not all hands-free features work with every hands-free device. Check the documentation that came with your hands-free device or the manufacturer's Web site for feature-compatibility information specific to your device.

Email

Note:

The following troubleshooting tips apply to the VersaMail® application only. If you are using Sprint PCS Business Connection ^SM Personal Edition or GoodLink ^TM as your email application, refer to the documentation included with those applications for troubleshooting tips.

I Have Problems Using My Account

Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account, verify that the account complies with your email provider's requirements by following these steps:

• Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
• Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. If this is the case, be sure to use your provider's network as the connection type for the account.
  Some email service providers have other requirements specific to their service. For example, Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to

download email messages from your Yahoo! account to your device. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist.

- Service provider settings change frequently. If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your wireless or email service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed.

I Have Problems Sending and Receiving Email

Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly, and check with Sprint Customer Service for outage information in your area.

Auto Sync Is Not Working

If an Auto Sync operation is occurring and you turn your device's phone off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected, the Auto Sync operation fails. If a scheduled Auto Sync doesn't take place or starts but does not finish, make sure your device's phone is on and that your data connection to your email service provider has not been interrupted.

I Have Problems Sending Email

If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps, in turn:

- Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless device. Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless device.

- Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use their SMTP servers. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for information on turning ESMTP on.

- Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server. Check with your email service provider for the correct outgoing mail server name.

I Have Problems Synchronizing Messages on My Device With Messages on My Computer

Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your device and your computer. For example, if the account is set up on your device to use the POP protocol, check HotSync manager on your computer to make sure that POP is selected as the protocol for that account.

My vCard or vCal Email Attachment Isn't Forwarding Correctly

Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:

1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings.
2. Select Control Panel.
3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.

4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software.

5. Click OK.

6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. (Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information.)

After I Get Messages, Either Manually or Through Auto Sync, Messages Disappear From My Inbox

If you have an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ^® , when you perform an Auto Sync, the last three days' worth of email messages are downloaded from your mail server to your Inbox. All messages older than three days are deleted from your Inbox; they are not deleted on the server, however.

You can change the setting in VersaMail ^® preferences to download fewer than three days' worth of messages (in which case, more-recent messages are deleted from your Inbox), or to download all messages regardless of the date (in which case all messages continue to appear in your Inbox).

I Am Using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, But Email Messages, Calendar Events, and Contacts Information Are Not Downloading to My Device

Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system. If you cannot obtain the name of this server (some companies do not give it out, because they do not want wireless access to their servers), you cannot synchronize email messages, Calendar events, and Contacts information with the server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.

Messaging

I Can't Tell If Data Services Are Available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100 for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are available.

If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services are not available in your current location.

I Can't Send or Receive SMS Text Messages

• Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
• Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes SMS messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Sprint should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
• Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages.
• If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).

I Can't Send or Receive Sprint PCS® Picture Mail Messages

- Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).

• Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes Sprint PCS Picture Mail messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Sprint should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
  Make sure that the Sprint PCS Vision icon or Sprint Power Vision ^SM icon

or ≈ appears in the title bar of the Main view of the Phone application. If you do not see one of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot exchange Picture Mail messages.

• Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle Picture Mail messages.
• If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device's phone as a modem), terminate the session (see “Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem” on page 118 or “Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem” on page 173).
• If a Picture Mail message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).

Web

I Can't Tell If Data Services Are Available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100 for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are available.

If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services are not available in your current location.

The Device Won't Connect to the Internet

Your Treo 700 _P smart device supports Sprint PCS Vision and Sprint Power Vision, two ways to connect to the Internet that are persistent and are faster and more reliable than a regular dial-up connection. All Sprint customers can connect to the Internet, but to avoid high per-minute charges, we recommend that you subscribe to a Sprint PCS Vision plan. Contact Sprint to verify that your subscription plan includes Sprint PCS Vision services and that these services have been correctly activated, and to confirm your username and password. Sprint should also be able to tell you if there are any outages in your area.

1. Press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. Then press and hold Power/End again to turn your phone back on.

2. Press Phone 📄 and look for either the Sprint PCS Vision icon 📋 or Sprint Power Vision icon 📋 or 📋 in the title bar of the Main view.

3. If you see one of these icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try connecting to the Internet again. If you do not see one of these icons, go to Applications ☐, select Prefs, and continue with the following steps.

4. Select Network.
5. Select the Service pick list and select PCS Vision. (If PCS Vision does not appear in the list, call Sprint for assistance.)
6. Select Connect.
7. If the connection is successful, go to the Web browser. If you still can't make a connection, perform a soft reset (see "Soft Reset" on page 314).
8. If your phone did not turn on automatically, press and hold Power/End to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the Internet.

9. Contact Sprint to verify the following:

10. Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services.

11. Data services have been activated on your account.
12. Data coverage is available in your location.
    There are no data service outages in your location.

I Can't Access a Web Page

First, make sure you have Internet access: Open the Web browser to see if you can view a Web page you’ve successfully viewed before. To ensure that you’re viewing the page directly from the Internet, open the menus ☐, select Go, and then select Refresh.

If you can view the page after you refresh it but you still can't access the page you were originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not

supported by the Web browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WMLScript, and other plug-ins.

Some Web sites use a redirector to their true home page. If the Web browser on your device can't follow the redirect, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and then enter that address in the Web browser on your device.

It Takes a Long Time for a Web Page to Load

If it is taking longer than usual to load Web pages, you may have traveled from a high-speed Sprint Power Vision service area to a Sprint PCS Vision service area. Although Sprint PCS Vision data service is considered a high-speed data service, it can seem slow if you are used to Sprint Power Vision speed.

1. Press Phone 📄 and look for the Sprint PCS Vision icon 🎯 or Sprint Power Vision icon 🌐 in the title bar of the Main view.

2. If you see the Sprint Power Vision icon or, there may be a problem with the Web site you are trying to access. Try opening a different Web page to see if the problem persists.

3. If you see the Sprint PCS Vision icon 📁, you may be experiencing the difference in performance between the two types of data networks.

4. To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to the Sprint network, press and hold Power/End 📄 to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it back on again.

5. Try opening the Web page again to see if it loads faster.

342 Section 7A: Help

An Image or Map Is Displayed Too Small on the Device Screen

The Web browser has two modes: Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized mode resizes all images and page elements to make them fit in a single vertical column on the Treo device screen. Switch to Wide Page mode to see the image in its original, full-size form (see “Viewing a Web Page” on page 160).

You may also be able to save the image to your device or to an expansion card and then view the image later on your computer (see “Downloading Files From a Web Page” on page 163 for information).

A Secure Site Refuses to Permit a Transaction

Some Web sites don't support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site's Webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your device's Web browser.

Dial-Up Networking Using Bluetooth Technology

My Computer Does Not Appear on the Trusted Devices Screen

• If you select Add Device and your computer does not appear on the list, make sure that the computer's Bluetooth setting is on and that the computer is discoverable. Check with your computer manufacturer for help with locating and changing these settings.
• Select Find More on the Trusted Devices screen again.

I Get a Message That There Is an Error Creating a DUN Connection With My Treo Device

- Re-create the partnership between your Treo 700 _P smart device and your computer (see “Accepting a Connection From Another Bluetooth Device” on page 177).

Camera

Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:

• Clean the camera's lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.
  Take pictures in brighter lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera.
• Hold the device as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm up against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall).
• Keep the subject of the pictures still. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you may see a blur.
• For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you, lighting the subject's face. Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.

- Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good focus.

Remember that when you synchronize your device with your computer, your photos and videos are stored on your hard drive (see “Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer” on page 202).

Making Room on Your Treo 700 _P Smart Device

Keep in mind that your Treo 700 _p smart device includes an expansion slot, and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards (sold separately). However, you still need free memory on the device itself to run applications from an expansion card.

If you store a large number of entries or install many third-party applications, the internal memory on your Treo 700p smart device may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space on your device:

• Email. Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory on your device. Delete emails with large attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or without attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room (see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD.)
• Pics&Videos Pictures can consume excessive memory. Move your pictures to an expansion card, synchronize them to your computer (see “Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer” on page 202), or upload them to your account on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site, and then delete large files from your Treo 700 _P smart device (see “Deleting a Picture or Video” on page 199).
• Music. Music files often consume excessive memory. Move music files to an expansion card, or delete large files from your device.
• Internet. If you have set a large Web browser cache, you may want to clear the cache (see “Customizing Your Web Browser Settings” on page 170).
• Third-party applications. You can delete infrequently used applications (see “Removing Applications” on page 258) or move them to an expansion card (see “Using Expansion Cards” on page 276).

Third-Party Applications

Some third-party applications can cause conflicts with your Treo device. Third-party applications that modify the wireless features of your device may require extra troubleshooting. If you recently installed an application and your Treo 700 smart device seems to be stuck, try the following:

1. Perform a soft reset (see "Soft Reset" on page 314).
2. If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see "System Reset" on page 315).
3. Delete the most recently installed application from your Treo 700 _P smart device (see “Removing Applications” on page 258).

4. If the problem persists, perform another system reset.

5. If possible, synchronize your device with your computer to back up your most recent information.

6. If you're unable to perform the steps above or the problem persists, locate your Backup folder on your computer and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that "Palm" in the following locations might be "Handspring" or "palmOne," based on the device you're upgrading from:

Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name.
■ Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device name.

1. Perform a hard reset (see "Hard Reset" on page 315).

2. Synchronize to restore your Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos information. You may need to manually restore information in other applications.

3. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup folder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install.

4. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.

Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Treo 700 smart device keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind. You may encounter strange behavior or errors in these applications if you use the keyboard and

5-way

Getting More Help

Contact the author or vendor of any third-party software if you require further assistance. Sprint does not provide technical support for applications that are not built into your Treo 700 _P smart device.

Errors

Your Treo device is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error occurs. If your device encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and resumes functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the error occurred.

Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. The Treo 700 smart device uses a special interface to show error messages in greater detail.

1. Press Phone

1. Enter ##377, and then press Talk
2. Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most recent automatic reset.
3. Select OK.

Please note that third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do not understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application for help.

Fixing an Error 67 Message

1. Press Phone

1. From the Dial Pad, enter ##data.
2. Open the menus ☐.
3. Select Update Vision Profile from the Options menu.
4. Select Now.

Section 7A: Help 349

For a Quick Introduction

- Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Treo device's features. It is already installed on your device, and you can open it any time. Go to Applications 📋, and then select Quick Tour 📋.

While Using Your Device

• On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is included right on your device. The on-device guide is specially formatted for your device screen. To view the on-device guide, go to Applications 📋, and then select My Treo 📋.
• Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting the most out of your device. To view these tips, open an application, open the menus Ⓜ, select Options, and then select Tips.
  Information: Many screens have a Tips icon 📄 in the upper-right corner. Select the Tips icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box.
• Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support information, go to www.palm.com/us/support/treo700pSprint.

If You Need More Information

Books: Many books on Palm OS devices are available in local or online book retailers (look in the computers section), or visit www.palm.com.
- Online forums: Consult online Treo device user discussion groups to swap information and learn about topics you may find nowhere else. Visit www.palm.com for details.

Visiting the Sprint Web Site

You can get up-to-date information on Sprint PCS ^® services and options by signing onto the Sprint Web site at www.sprint.com.

When you visit Sprint online, you can

• Review coverage maps
- Learn how to use voicemail
- Access your account information
• Purchase accessories
- Add additional options to your service plan
- Check out frequently asked questions
And more

Reaching Sprint Customer Service

You can reach Sprint Customer Service many different ways:

• On your Treo 700 _P smart device, press Phone ☐; enter *2, and then press Talk ☐.
  • Sign on to your account at www.sprint.com.
• Call toll-free at 1-888-211-4727 (Consumer customers), -or-
  1-888-788-4727 (Business customers).
  ●Write to Sprint Customer Service, P.O. Box 8077, London, KY 40742.

Receiving Automated Invoicing Information

For your convenience, your phone gives you access to invoicing information on your Sprint PCS Account. This information includes balance due, payment received, invoicing cycle, and the number of minutes used since your last invoicing cycle. (Normal airtime usage will apply.)

Press Phone Ⓤ, enter *4, and then press Talk 📄.

Note: This service may not be available in all Affiliate areas.

Sprint 411

You have access to a variety of services and information through Sprint 411, including residential, business, and government listings; assistance with local or long-distance calls; movie listings; and hotel, restaurant, shopping, and major local event information. There is a per-call charge and you will be billed for airtime.

Press Phone ⚫, enter 411, and then press Talk 📄.

Sprint PCS Operator Services

Sprint PCS Operator Services provides assistance when placing collect calls or when placing calls billed to a local telephone calling card or third party.

Press Phone Ⓤ, enter 0, and then press Talk 📄.

For more information or to see the latest in products and services, visit Sprint online at www.sprint.com.

Glossary

1xEV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology (also known as EVDO) that is designed for very high-speed data transfer with average download speeds of 400 to 700Kbps and that is capable of reaching speeds up to a theoretical maximum of 2.4Mb/s, and upload speeds up to 156Kb/s. The Sprint Power Vision ^SM Network uses 1xEV-DO technology.

1xRTT: A standard of Mobile Internet connectivity that allows for persistent data connections as long as you are actively using your data connection. The average data transmission rate is around 70Kb/s, although theoretical limits are 153.6Kb/s. With Sprint PCS Vision® plans, you pay a monthly rate for unlimited data transfer and you don't pay for connection time.

Alt (alternative) Alt: A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press Alt to access variations such as international characters and symbols.

Applications 📞: The screen on your Treo™ 700p smart device from which you can open all applications.

Auto-off interval: The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your Treo 700 P smart device turns off. The wireless features on your device are unaffected by this setting.

Beam: To send or receive an entry or application using the infrared port on your Treo 700 P smart device.

Bluetooth® wireless technology: Technology that enables devices such as smart devices, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances.

Device name: The name associated with your Treo device that distinguishes it from other Palm OS ^® devices. When you first synchronize your device, you are asked to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in Palm ^® Desktop software.

Dial-up networking: Wireless technology that enables you to convert your device into a wireless modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer.

Dialog box: A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task.

Favorite: A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed dial) or commonly used application (Contacts, Web, Messaging, and so on). You can define up to 70 favorite buttons in the Phone application.

GoodLink™ Applications software: An optional secure wireless messaging application allowing real-time push synchronization with your Microsoft Outlook server.

HotSync®: The technology that synchronizes your Treo 700 _P smart device and your computer with the simple press of a button.

HotSync manager: The computer application that manages the synchronization with your Treo 700p smart device.

Infrared (IR): A way of transmitting information using light waves. The IR port on your Treo 700 _P smart device enables you to transfer information between other IR devices within a short radius.

Lithium Ion (Li-Ion): The rechargeable battery technology used in Treo devices.

On Demand: A Sprint Power Vision Network feature that allows you to personalize your device's data features.

Option key Ⓞ: The keyboard button that enables you to access the number, symbol, or feature that appears above the letter on each key.

Palm® Desktop software: A PIM application for computers that helps you manage your personal information and keep it synchronized with your Treo 700 _p smart device.

Palm OS ^® : The operating system of your Treo 700 P smart device. Palm OS is known for its simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party applications that can be added to your Treo 700 P smart device.

Palm™ Quick Install: The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install Palm OS applications and other information on your Treo 700p smart device.

Partnership: Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your device and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, or trusted pair on some devices.

Phone 📞: The application on your Treo device that enables you to make and receive phone calls.

Phone as Modem: Feature that enables your device (when connected to the Sprint Power Vision network) to be used as a high-speed modem for your computer, using a wired (USB sync cable) connection.

PIM (personal information management): A genre of software that includes applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.

SMS: The service that enables devices to exchange short text messages almost instantly. Text messages are typically exchanged between mobile phones. These messages can usually include up to 160 characters. Your device can send and receive SMS messages while you are on a voice call.

Sprint PCS Business Connection ^™ : A service offered by Sprint that enables you to access your existing corporate or personal email on your Treo ^™ 700 smart device. For more information, visit www.sprint.com.

Sprint PCS® Picture Mail: An enhanced Sprint PCS Vision messaging service that enables you to instantly share pictures and videos with friends and family. You can also manage your pictures and videos online.

Sprint PCS Vision®: The next generation of Mobile Internet access that enables you to check your email, browse the Web, and share pictures and videos with Sprint PCS Picture Mail.

Sprint Power Vision ^SM Network: An advanced mobile data network using the fastest commercially available wireless network technology (EVDO) to deliver broadband-like transfer speeds for your data connections.

Sprint TV ^SM : A Sprint Power Vision Network service that allows you to view live Mobile Digital TV (MDTV) on your Treo 700 smart device.

Streaming: Technology that enables you to access media content—for example, to watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your device without needing to download a file that you save on your device.

User folder: The folder on your computer that contains both the information you enter in Palm® Desktop software and the information you enter on your device and synchronize with Palm Desktop software.

358 Section 7B: Glossary

Safety and Specifications

Sprint

Important Safety Information

In This Section

General Precautions
◆ Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device
♦ Caring for the Battery
Radiofrequency (RF) Energy
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device
Owner's Record
User's Guide Proprietary Notice

- Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device

This guide contains important operational and safety information that will help you safely use your Treo™ 700p smart device. Failure to read and follow the information provided in this guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.

Section 8A: Important Safety Information 361

General Precautions

There are several simple guidelines to operating your device properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.

• Hold the device with the antenna over your shoulder.
• Try not to hold, bend, or twist the device's antenna.

• Don’t use the device if the antenna is damaged.
  Speak directly into the microphone.

• Avoid exposing your device and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your device does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.
  Although your device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.

• Any changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.

Note:

For the best care of your device, only Sprint authorized personnel should service your device and accessories. Failure to do so may be dangerous and void your warranty.

Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device

Do Not Rely on Your Device's Phone for Emergency Calls

Wireless phones such as the one on your Treo device operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communication (for example, medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use. Check with your local service provider for details.

Using Your Phone While Driving

Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety always comes first.

Tip:

Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint Store, or call the Sprint PCS Accessory Hotline at 1-800-974-2221 or by entering #222 on your Treo 700p smart device.

Following Safety Guidelines

To operate your device safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a given area. Turn your device's phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or danger.

Using Your Device's Phone Near Other Electronic Devices

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment.

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.

Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals.

Note:

Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before using the phone near medical equipment.

Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying

Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air.

Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas

To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.

Turn your phone off when you're in any area that has a potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it's rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:

• Fueling areas such as gas stations.
  Below deck on boats.
  ● Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
• Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
• Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle's engine.

Note:

Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquid, or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.

Restricting Children's Access to Your Device

Your Treo device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device and/or its phone, or make calls that increase your Sprint PCS Invoice.

Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device

Your Treo™ 700p smart device is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid

Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product, please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.

Your device has been tested for hearing aid device compatibility. When some wireless phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of interference they generate.

The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their mobile phones, to assist hearing device users in finding phones that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that have been rated will have an “M3” or “M4” rating on the box. Your Treo 700 _P smart device phone has an M3 rating.

Note:

Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and may generate less interference to hearing devices than phones that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings.

The M3/M4 ratings do not guarantee successful interoperation between your phone and hearing aid device. Results will vary depending on the level of immunity of your hearing device and degree of your hearing loss.

The more immune your hearing aid device is, the less likely you are to experience interference noise from your wireless phone. Hearing aid devices should have ratings similar to phones. Ask your hearing healthcare professional for the rating

of your aids. Most new hearing aids have at least an M2 immunity level. Add the "M" ratings of your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable usability:

• Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers best use.
  ●Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.
  ●Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable.

Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you will have a combined rating of six for “best use.”

Sprint further suggests you experiment with multiple phones (even those not labeled M3 or M4) while in the store to find the one that works best with your hearing aid device. Should you experience interference after purchasing your phone, promptly return it to the store. With the Sprint 14-day Risk-Free Guarantee you may return the phone within 14 days of purchase for a full refund.

Getting the Best Hearing Device Experience With Your Treo 700 _P Smart Device

To further minimize interference:

• There is usually less interference on the microphone setting than the telecoil setting.
• Set the phone's screen and keyboard backlight settings to ensure the minimum time interval. See “Optimizing Power Settings” on page 296 for instructions.
• Position the phone so the antenna is farthest from your hearing aid.
• Move the phone around to find the point with least interference.

Protecting Your Battery

The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery's performance.

• Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Sprint is not aware of similar problems with Sprint PCS® Treo devices resulting from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved by Sprint or the manufacturer of your phone. Use only Sprint or manufacturer-approved batteries and accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your device’s manufacturer, or call 1-866-343-1114 to order. They’re also available atwww.sprint.com — click the Wireless link under Personal, and then click Accessories under Shop the PCS Store Online. Buying the right batteries and accessories is the best way to ensure they’re genuine and safe.
• In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32^ircF to 113^ircF ( 0^ircC to 45^ircC ).
• Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the bathroom.
  ● Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
• Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
• Don't attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
• The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time.

It's best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.
- Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules:

■Less than one month:
-4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)
■More than one month:
-4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)

Disposal of Lithium Ion (Lilon) Batteries

Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lilon battery as you can be burned.

For safe disposal options of your Lilon batteries, contact your nearest Sprint authorized service center.

Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.

Radiofrequency (RF) Energy

Understanding How Your Phone Operates

Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it's turned on, it receives and transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.

Knowing Radiofrequency Safety

The design of your Sprint PCS Treo device complies with updated NCRP standards described below.

In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI's 1982 standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP).

Body-Worn Operation

To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset on your body, use the Sprint-supplied or -approved carrying case, holster, or other body-worn accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure the antenna is at least 7/16 inch (1.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. Use of non-Sprint-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.

For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Web site at www.fcc.gov.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) for Wireless Phones

The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.

The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring, and calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone design, and other factors. What is important to remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety.

All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.

The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo™ 700p smart device by Palm are:

Maximum SAR Values CDMA Cellular CDMA PCS
Held to Ear 1.48 (W/Kg) 1.13 (W/Kg)
Body-Worn .896 (W/Kg) .589 (W/Kg)

The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo™ 700p smart device by Palm on the Sprint Power Vision ^SM Network (EVDO mode) are:

Maximum SAR Values EVDO Cellular EVDO PCS
Body-Worn .801 (W/Kg) .678 (W/Kg)

FCC Radiofrequency Emission

FCC Radiofrequency Emission

This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:

FCC ID number: O8F93001.

More information on the phone's SAR can be found from the following

FCC Web site:

https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.

Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.

Description of ESD

Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.

ESD-Susceptible Equipment

Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.

Precautions Against ESD

Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:

• Ground yourself when you're holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.
• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
  • Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.

Conditions That Enhance ESD Occurrences

Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:

• Low relative humidity.
  ●Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)
• The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.

While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.

Owner's Record

The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future.

Model: Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700 ^p , by Palm

Serial No.:

User's Guide Proprietary Notice

CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following patents:

4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797

5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501

5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239

5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338

5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569

5,490,165 5,511,073

User's Guide template version 5B (October 2005)

376 Section 8A: Important Safety Information

Section 8B

Specifications

In This Section

Specifications

Section 8B: Specifications 377

Specifications

Radio CDMA 1900/800 MHz digital dual-band EVDO and 1xRTT
Phone features Personal	speakerphoneHands-free headset jack(2.5mm, 3-barrel connector)	Microphone mute optionTTY/TDD compatibility3-way calling
Processor technology Intel XScaleTM processor, 312MHz
Expansion SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot
Battery Rechargeable Lithium IonRemovable for replacement		3.5 hours full charge time
Palm OS version Palm OS® 5.4.9
Camera (not included on all models)	Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel2x digital zoomVideo capture resolution (352 x 288)Automatic light balance
Size/weight 5.08" x 2.28" x 0.89" with antenna(129 mm x 58 mm x 22.5 mm)6.4 ounces (180 g)
Connectivity Bluetooth®	wireless technology(1.2 compliant)	IR
Display Touch-sensitive	LCD screen (includes stylus)65,536 colors (16-bit color)User-adjustable brightness
Keyboard Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigatorBacklight for low lighting conditions
Included software Phone	(including Palm OS, Favorites, Dial Pad)CameraCamcorderPics&VideosWeb browser (Internet)Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSMVersaMail®(email)CalendarContactsTasksSMS (text messages)	Sprint PCS® Picture Mail(multimedia messages)Calculator (basic/advanced)MemosWorld ClockVoice MemoDocuments To GoPalm® Desktop software/HotSync® managerSprint TVPocket TunesTM(music)
System requirements W	Windows 2000 or XP with USB portMac OS 10.2–10.3.x with USB portLater versions may also be supported
Operating and storage temperature range	32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C) 5% to 90% Relative Humidity (RH)

378 Section 8B: Specifications

380 Section 8B: Specifications

Index

Numerics

1xEV-DO (EVDO) technology 353

1xRTT connections 100

1XRTT protocol 353

24-hour clock 288

5-way navigator 7, 40, 299

911 phone calls 95, 97, 299

A

AC charger 9, 13, 15, 307

accented characters 48, 49

accessing

Alert screen 103

alternate characters 48

applications 52

calculator 248

command buttons 42

common tasks 78

corporate accounts 306

Dial Pad 57, 68

email 110, 142, 143

Guest Book 150

On Demand information 116

online album 200

Palm online support 350

personal accounts 24, 351

personal information 24, 301

Phone Book 220

Index 381

Sprint PCS Vision services 111

Sprint Web site 351

streamed media channels 215

VersaMail 128

voicemail 23, 65, 66

voicemail messages 23

Web pages 152, 159

World Clock 246

accessories 276, 307

Account Name field 127

account passwords 24

Account Setup command 126

Account setup complete screen 126

accounts 23, 24, 122

See also Sprint PCS Vision accounts;

Sprint Power Vision accounts

Accounts command 126, 136

Accounts Setup dialog box 126, 127

actions 7, 41, 78

activating Treo smart device 5, 20

Active Call view 67, 69, 71

active calls 63, 67, 74

See also phone; phone calls

ActiveSync servers 124, 141

adapters 307

Add Bookmark command 167

Add Call button 68, 71

Add Contact command 70

Add Favorite dialog box 79

Add New Number dialog box 70

Add Songs to Playlist screen 210, 211

Add to a Contact button 70

adding

accessories 276, 307

alerts 137, 228

backgrounds 232

Bluetooth devices 176

bookmarks 167–169

caller ID pictures 221

categories 290

cities to World Clock 246

contacts 70, 220

emoticons 147, 150

events 226, 228, 229

favorite buttons 78–81

memos 240

multimedia messages 148–150

partnerships 85, 272

passkeys 85

passwords 23, 24, 303

phone numbers 70, 74

QuickText phrases 150

signatures 140

songs to playlists 210, 211

speed-dial buttons 79

tasks 235

text messages 146, 150

voice captions 188

wallpaper 92

Address Book 76

addresses

adding multiple 80

creating links for 152

entering multimedia message 148

entering text messaging 146

highlighting 42

multiple recipients and 150

selecting 42

adjusting screen brightness 17, 286

adjusting volume

alert tones 89

device ringer 7, 88, 90

music 209

phone calls 21, 90

Advanced Encryption Standard 123

Advanced Mode (calculator) 248, 249, 250

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) 123

After deleting a message pick list 135

Agenda view 224, 232

See also Calendar application

alarm 10, 88, 89, 101

See also alerts

alarm clock 247

Alarm Preset check box 234

Alarm Sound pick list 234, 239

alarm tones 233

album pick list 201

albums (Pics&Videos) 195–197, 200

alert icon (device) 101

alert icon (voicemail) 66

Alert Manager symbol 321

Alert me of failures check box 138

Alert me of new mail check box 137

alert preferences 89

Alert screen 64, 103, 151, 228

Alert Sound pick list 137

alert tones 89, 90, 157

alerts

adding 137, 228

assigning to tasks 239

caution for incoming calls and 63

customizing 89

deleting 103

displaying 101, 103, 228

receiving messages and 151, 157

selecting 103

untimed events and 228

voicemail and 64, 66

Alerts command 137, 157

aligning screen 289

Alt key 46, 353

alternate characters 48, 49

anniversaries 228

Answer button 62, 71

answering phone 23, 62, 63, 71, 87

answering service. See voicemail

antenna 10

application buttons 7, 50, 80, 292

application preferences 27, 290–291, 293

application settings. See application preferences

applications

accessing available 52

arranging 290, 291

associating with buttons 80, 292

beaming 266

composing email messages and 130

copying 280

customizing 290

cycling through 52

displaying information about 260

displaying list of 291

displaying menus for 43, 46

displaying private entries in 304

downloading 163, 256

expansion cards and 279

5-way navigator and third-party 40

getting help with 350

highlighting 52

installing 255–257, 346, 347

making phone calls and 69

opening 50–52, 279

removing 258, 259

searching 254

selecting synchronization 31, 34

sending over Bluetooth connections 261

setting default 293

synchronizing 33, 34

transferring 27

troubleshooting 347

uninstalling 315

updating information in 33

Applications button 52

Applications view 50, 52, 291, 353

appointments. See Calendar application; events

Archive folder 258

area conversions (calculator) 249

arrow icons (documentation) 40

Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls check box 70

assistance 24, 350, 352

Attach from device option 149

Attach from Online option 149

Attach Signature check box 140

attachments

displaying 133, 143

document files and 132

downloading 134

pictures and videos and 131

removing 131

ringtones and 133

storing large 346

voice memos and 132, 245

Attachments dialog box 131, 132

attendees (events) 231

audio 82

See also music

audio captions 188, 193, 194, 201

audio files 206

audio formats 206

audio player. See Pocket Tunes

Auto answer pick list 87

Auto Lock Device box 301

Auto naming pick list 192

Auto Sync command 136

Auto Sync dialog box 136

Auto-Keyguard preference 298

automated invoicing information 352

automatic resets 349

automatic shut-off 296

Auto-off after pick list 296

auto-off interval 296, 353

B

back view (device) 8

Background check box 232

background music 194

backgrounds 232

backing up information 33

backlight (keyboard) 46

Backspace key 59

Backup folder 258, 259

Basic Mode (calculator) 248

basics ii, 20, 33, 350

battery

charging 13–14, 16

conserving power for 16–17

inserting 11

recharging 16

replacing 12, 307, 317

specifications for 378

viewing status of 13, 14, 101, 102

battery door release 8, 11

battery icon 14, 16, 101

battery-charge indicators 13, 102

battery-ready indicator 13, 14

Bcc option (email) 130

beam (defined) 353

Beam Business Card command 223

Beam Category command 265

Beam command 265, 266

Beam Receive pick list 296

Beam Receive, disabling 17

Beam Status dialog box 265, 266

beaming information 264–267, 353

beeps 55, 86

See also alerts

bell 103, 321

belt clip 307

billing information 112

birthdays 228

blank favorite buttons 79, 80

blank screens 320

blinking bell 103, 321

blinking indicator light 14, 103

Bluetooth application

device connections and 175, 176

hands-free devices and 84–85

partnerships and 179

synchronizing and 272

Bluetooth button 84

Bluetooth devices

connecting to 84, 174–177

routing phone calls to 85, 86

setting preferences for 87

temporarily disabling 17

transferring calls from 68

troubleshooting 333

viewing status of 101

Bluetooth icon 84, 101

Bluetooth Preferences screen 101

Bluetooth technology 174, 354

bookmarks 167–169, 264

Bookmarks view 168

Bookmarks view icon 168

border glow (highlight) 42

brightness (screen) 17, 286

broadband connections 119

browser. See Web browser

built-in applications 255, 258, 350, 379

built-in camera. See camera

built-in security software 297

business cards 223, 266

Business Connection application. See

Sprint PCS Business Connection

business directories 110

buttons

accessing command 42

accidentally pressing 68

assigning Quick Keys to 78, 79, 80

changing favorite 81

creating favorite 78–81

disabling onscreen 299

enabling dialog box 43

5-way navigator 40

highlighting 42

opening applications and 50

reassigning 7,292

restoring factory defaults for 292

selecting 41

setting preferences for 292

waking up screen with 55

buzz (headset) 83

C

cache 171, 346

cache preferences 171

calculating disk space 27–28

calculator 248–250

Calculator icon 248

calendar

See also Calendar application; events

accessing 110, 142, 143

adding alerts to 228

adding backgrounds to 232

customizing 231–233

displaying 51

moving through 225

setting default view for 232

setting first day of week for 288

transferring to smart device 27

Calendar application

See also calendar

changing screen fonts for 287

color-coding events with 230

defining custom intervals for 229

displaying current event in 93, 102

managing events with 224–231

opening 7, 51, 93

selecting views 224

setting display options in 231

setting sound preferences 233

updating information in 33, 34

viewing event status for 102

Calendar button 7,224

call forwarding 73

call forwarding icon 101

Call forwarding pick list 74

call lists 61

Call Log button 61, 80

Call Log dialog box 61, 70

call waiting 71, 98

call waiting alerts 63

Call Waiting dialog box 71

caller ID 70

caller ID pictures 91, 110, 186

caller ID preferences 89, 91

caller ID ringtones 91

calling cards 352

calling Sprint Customer Service 24, 351

calls. See phone calls

Camcorder application 196

Camcorder application 188, 191

Camcorder icon 188

camera

customizing 191

location of built-in 8

power consumption and 16

specifications for 378

taking pictures 186–188

Camera applicaion 196

Camera application 187, 191

Camera icon 187

Cancel button (Active Call) 68

Cancel Spkr button 67

Caps Lock 47

Card Info application 281

Card Info button 281

card readers 207

categories 221, 263, 290

Category command 290

Category pick list

applications 290

contacts 92

events 230, 232, 233

memos 240

tasks 235, 237

cautions iii, 9

Cc option (email) 130

CDs 208

Center button 44

Change Lock Code setting 300

changing

bookmarks 168

color scheme 289

contact information 222

default settings 283

events 231

favorite buttons 81

information 26

passwords 24, 304

playlists 211

screen fonts 287

channel icon 214

characters

accessing international 353

defining Quick Keys and 78

displaying alternate 48

displaying hexadecimal 249

entering alternate 48

entering from keyboard 47

maximum in notes 240

maximum in text messages 146

messages and invalid 147, 150

searching on 254

Index 387

charge indicator icon 102

charge indicator light 13, 14

charger adapter 15

charger cable 13, 15, 32

charger jack 13, 15

chargers (optional) 307

charging connector 9, 13, 15

charging the battery 13–14, 16

chat preferences 156

Chat screen 154, 157

chat session icon 155

chat sessions 109, 154

City pick list 246

Clear Cache preferences 171

Clear Voicemail Icon button 96

clock 246, 288

clock preferences 294

closing Internet connections 119

collect calls 352

color palette 191

color preferences 289

color-coded category marker 233

color-coding events 230

colored backgrounds 42

Colors Theme screen 289

command buttons 42

command shortcuts (menus) 43

common tasks 78

compact discs 208

company names 305

completed tasks 238

completion dates 238

Compose dialog box 146, 149

Compress Day View check box 232

compressed files 256

computers. See CPUs

conduit software 31

Conf button 73

conference calls 71, 72, 74, 75

configuring Sprint PCS Vision services 108

Confirm message deletions check box 156

Connect to the Internet dialog box 108

connecting smart device 32

connecting to power sources 14

connection icons 100, 112

Connection Manager 118

connections

accessing Internet and 55, 118, 354

Bluetooth devices 84, 174–177

closing 119

overview 26

PCs and 32, 118

power consumption and 16

precautions for 374

receiving information over Bluetooth 262

sending information over Bluetooth 261

Sprint PCS Vision services 111

Sprint Power Vision services 114

troubleshooting 330, 334, 340

TTY devices and 96

viewing status of 100, 338, 340

connectivity 378

constants 250

Contact Edit dialog box 91, 221

contacts

adding 220

assigning pictures to 91, 299, 300

changing information for 222

creating 70

deleting 222

dialing by 58

entering multiple 220, 224

entering phone numbers for 70, 94

marking as private 221

searching for 58, 59, 92

selecting caller ID ringtones for 91, 92

sending email to 129

synchronizing 33, 34

text messaging to 147

transferring to smart device 27

viewing phone numbers for 59

Contacts application

adding contacts and 220

changing contact information

and 222

changing screen fonts for 287

creating business cards and 223

opening 220

updating information in 33, 34

Contacts buttons 80, 220

Contacts list 59, 147, 222

context-sensitive actions 7

conversion functions 249

cookies 170

coprocessing units. See CPUs

copying

applications 280

multimedia files 202

phone numbers 57

pictures 196

text 165

video clips 196

corporate accounts 122, 141, 142, 306

corporate address lists 143

coverage area 17, 100, 330

Coverage in/out pick list 90

coverage maps 351

CPUs

connecting to 32, 118

interactions with 26

removing applications from 259

transferring music from 206

updating information on 33

Create a New Contact button 70

Create chats from messages pick list 156

creating

alerts 137, 228

backgrounds 232

bookmarks 167–169

categories 290

contacts 70, 220

email messages 129

events 226, 228, 229

favorite buttons 78–81

memos 240

multimedia messages 148–150

partnerships 85, 272

passkeys 85

passwords 23, 24, 303

playlists 210–211

QuickText phrases 150

signatures 140

speed-dial buttons 79

tasks 235

text messages 146, 150

voice captions 188

wallpaper 92

current event 93, 102

Current Privacy pick list 303

Customer Service (Sprint) 24, 351

customer support (Palm) 350

customizing

alerts 89

application buttons 292

applications 290–291

calendar 231–233

camera 191

favorite buttons 78

messages 156

phone 88–96

screen 286–289

tasks 238

Treo smart device 283

VersaMail 136

Web browser 170–172

D

Daily Repeating Events check box 233

data connection icons 100, 112

data networks. See network connections

data service icons 338, 340

data services 114, 338, 340

Date & Time Preferences screen 294

date formats 288

Date pick list 288

Date stamp pick list 191

dates. See calendar

Day view 225, 232

Daylight Savings Time 294

decimal display formats 249, 288

decreasing phone volume 21

Default Apps preferences 293

default password 24

Default View pick list 232

defaults, restoring 292

Delete command 135

Delete Contact command 222

Delete From pick list 258

Delete Item command 238, 240

Delete Old command 135

deleting

alerts 103

applications 258, 259

attachments 131

bookmarks 168

contacts 222

device names 29

email 134, 346

events 231

favorite buttons 81

groups of messages 135

memos 240

photos 188

playlists 211

private entries 304

tasks 238

text messages 153

videos 189

desktop software 26, 31, 34

See also Palm Desktop software

Details button 42

Device Name field 84, 272

device names

defined 354

deleting 29

hands-free devices and 84

synchronizing and 272

device resets 29, 301, 314–316

devices

See also Bluetooth devices; Palm OS

devices; Treo smart device

electrostatic discharge and 373

naming 29, 84, 272

physically-impaired disabilities and 96

upgrades and 29

Dial another call? prompt 71

Dial button 60

Dial Extra Digits Automatically option 80

Dial Number dialog box 60

Dial Pad 56, 57, 68, 92

Dial Pad buttons 80

Dial Preferences command 93

Dial Preferences dialog box 94

dial tones 95

dialing 57–60, 68, 80, 94

dialing preferences 93

dialing shortcuts 79

dialog boxes 43, 350, 354

dial-up networking 354

dial-up networking icon 101

digital movies 109

digital networks 98

digital pictures 109

dimming device screen 51

Directory Assistance 352

Index 391

Disable Cookies check box 170

Disable Images check box 171

Disable JavaScript check box 171

disabling

onscreen buttons 299

Treo smart device 17

Discovery icon 176

discovery results list 176

Discovery Results screen 261

disk space 27–28, 346

Display my name in chat window as option 157

display options (calendar) 231

Display Options command 231

display. See screen

displaying

alerts 101, 103

alternate characters 48

applications 290, 291

attachments 133, 143

calendar 51

connection status 100, 338, 340

contact information 222

current event 102

decimal values 249, 288

email messages 102, 128

events 93, 233

favorite button assignments 79

items in pick lists 44

menu items 43, 46

numeric pages 66

on-device guide 350

pending alerts 228

phone numbers 59

pictures 193, 200, 202

private entries 303

recently dialed numbers 61

recording time 190

status information 7,100

streamed media 214, 216

tasks 232, 237, 238

tips 350

unread messages 232

video clips 194, 202

Web pages 160, 166, 167

docking cradle 307

documentation ii, 4, 40, 350

Documents application 143, 242, 243

Domino mail servers 123

downloading

applications 163, 256

attachments 134

email messages 136

files 139, 163

from the Web 163–164

images 110

ringtones 88, 109

songs 206

Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118

downward-pointing arrows 44

Drafts button 130

Drafts folder 150

DTMF tones 95

Due Date pick list 235

E-911 service feature 95

earpiece 7, 68

eBooks 16

Edit Bookmarks command 168

Edit Category dialog box 92

Edit Favorites Button command 81

Edit Favorites Pages command 78, 81

Edit QuickText option 150

editing. See changing

Effects pick list 191

electrostatic discharge 373–374

email

accessing 110, 142, 143, 306

active phone calls and 69

adding attachments to 131–133

adding links to 152

adding signatures to 140

addressing 80

attaching voice memos to 245

checking status of 128

checking unread messages for 102, 232

configuring for VersaMail 125–127

copying to multiple recipients 130

creating 129

deleting 134, 346

getting messages 128, 136, 138, 141

highlighting addresses 42

marking priority for 130

maximum message size for 139

power consumption for 16

removing attachments from 131

responding to 129

saving drafts 130

sending 130

setting alerts for 137

setting default browser for 293

sorting 128

Sprint PCS Business Connections and 111

switching accounts for 136

synchronizing 123, 143

troubleshooting 334–337

viewing attachments in 133, 143

viewing messages 102, 128

email accounts 122, 124

email applications 31, 51, 122

Email buttons 80

Email icon 125, 128

email message icon 102

email preferences 136–140

email providers 122, 124, 125

emergency phone calls 95, 97, 299

emoticons icon 147, 150

emotive symbols 150

Empty battery icon 14

Empty Trash command 135

Enable Background Playback check box 210

Enable Local Network Time box 294

entering

information 26, 33, 47

passkeys 176, 177

passwords. See passwords

phone numbers 57, 58, 92

errors 349

Escalate ring tone volume check box 88

ESD (electrostatic discharge) 373–374

EVDO technology 353

event conflicts 102, 232

event icon 102

events

See also calendar; Calendar application

adding alerts for 228

adding notes to 231

assigning time zones to 227

changing 231

checking status of 102

color-coding 230

creating 226, 228, 229

deleting 231

displaying 93, 233

purging 231

rescheduling 231

scheduling 226

synchronizing 33, 34

transferring to smart device 27

viewing duration of 232

Excel files 132, 133, 242, 243

Exchange mail servers 123

exiting pick lists 44

expansion card slot 10, 276, 378

expansion cards

copying applications to 280

downloading to 163, 164

formatting 281, 282

moving pictures to 196

opening applications on 279

overview 276

removing applications from 258

storing information on 346

transferring music to 206

viewing information about 281

extending battery life 16

extensions (phone calls) 68, 80, 94

Extra Digits button 65, 68

Extra Digits option 80

F

fade setting 232

FAQs 351

favorite buttons

changing 81

creating 78–81

defined 354

deleting 81

dialing with 59, 79

displaying in Phone application 93

locating blank 79

naming 79

upgrading and 78

Favorites pages 79, 81

features 43, 109

fields 41, 44

files

attaching to email 133

downloading 139, 163

installing quarantined 29

location of quarantied 27

opening 243

streaming from Web pages 164

transferring 27

financial calculator 249

financial information 117

Find dialog box 254

Find Text on Page command 166

finding

blank favorite buttons 79

contacts 58, 59, 92

Sprint PCS Vision user names 111

text 166, 254

5-way navigator 299

Flash mode 74

flight mode 55

folder icon 134

folder pick list 129

folders 129, 357

Font command 287

fonts 287

forgetting passwords 301, 304

formats (email) 139

Formats command 288

Formats Preferences screen 288

formatting

date and time 288

expansion cards 281, 282

numbers 288

forwarding phone calls 73–74, 101

Free Space information 28

freeing memory 171, 238, 258, 346

frequently asked questions 351

front view (device) 6

Full battery icon 14

full charge (battery) 13

function keys 46

functions 249

G

Game Volume pick list 285

games 16, 109

Games icon 109

Get BC icon 142

Get Good icon 143

getting started ii, 20, 33, 350

Glossary 353

Go to Next Message option 135

GoodLink application 122, 143, 354

graphics. See images

green lightning bolt 14

Guest Book 150

H

handset speaker 7

hands-free car kit 82, 84

hands-free devices

compatible headsets for 82

connecting to 9, 84–86

features described 86

setting preferences for 87

setting up 84

troubleshooting 333–334

Handsfree Preferences screen 87

Hands-free Setup button 85

Hang Up All button 67, 69, 72

hard resets 301, 315

hardware 4

headphones 82

headset button 83

headset icon 101

headset jack 9

headsets 9, 69, 82, 83

hearing-impaired services 96

help 24, 257, 348, 351

hexadecimal characters 249

Hide Records setting 303

hiding private entries 303

highlighting

applications 52

items on screen 41

menu items 43

phone numbers 60

pick lists 44

text 42

Web links 42, 161

high-speed connections 100, 119

hints 301

History command 166

History list 166

Hold button 68, 71

holidays 228

home city 246

home pages 170

HotSync button 32, 35

HotSync cable 32, 35, 307

HotSync connector 9

HotSync cradle 307

HotSync manager 354

HotSync operations 28, 35, 354

See also synchronization

HTML formats 139

hyperlinks. See Web links

|

icons 100, 109, 291

Ignore button 62, 72

Ignore with Text button 62, 72

images

creating wallpaper from 92

disabling Web page 171

downloading 110

saving 164

setting preferences for 191

troubleshooting 343

inactive data connections 100

inactive devices 302

Inbox

displaying messages in 102, 128

message descriptions in 155

selecting chat sessions from 154

sorting messages in 128

Inbox folder 129

Inbox icons 128

Incoming command 138

Incoming dialog box 138

incoming message icon 155

incompatible applications 27

increasing phone volume 21

indicator light 7, 13, 14, 103

Info command 27

Info screen 27, 260

information

accessing 24, 301

backing up 33

beaming 264–267, 353

changing 26

entering 26, 33, 47

locking 297

losing 282, 301, 315

marking as private 302

protecting 24, 302

receiving automated invoicing 352

receiving over Bluetooth connections 262

recharging battery and 16

restoring 301

sending over Bluetooth connections 261

setting owner preferences for 305

storing 346

synchronizing 16, 26, 31, 33

transferring 27

updating 26, 33

information screens 41

Infrared port. See IR port

infrared-enabled devices 10

inserting battery 11

Installation CD 5, 30

installation wizard 31

installer 255

installing

applications 255–257, 346, 347

bonus software 255

Index 397

Palm desktop software 5, 30

quarantined files 29

Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118

synchronization software 30

third-party applications 319

interference 331, 333

international characters 353

international clock 246, 288

international phone numbers 94

international travel adapters 307

Internet connections

accessing 118, 354

closing 119

installing from 256

setting up proxy server for 172

troubleshooting 340

viewing online album from 200

Internet features 55

invalid characters 150

invoicing information 352

IR devices 354

IR port 10, 264, 354

items on screen 41, 42

iTunes 205

K

key presses 45

keyboard

accessing alternate characters on 48

dialing with 58

locking 297, 299

overview 45–48

restoring factory defaults for 292

selecting menu items from 43

setting timed events with 226

setting up Quick Keys for 78, 79, 80

silencing ringer from 63

keyboard backlight 46

keyboard shortcuts 292

Keyguard 54, 297

Keyguard preferences 298, 299

Known Caller pick list 88

L

Label color pick list 157

labeling favorite buttons 79

language settings 320

language-impaired services 96

large attachments 346

Late Breaking News & Photos

selection 116

launching applications 50–52, 279

LED display 7

length conversions 249

lens (camera) 8

letters. See characters

liability 2

light. See indicator light

lightning bolts 14

Li-Ion battery. See battery

Li-Ion technology 354

links. See Web links

list screens 41, 42

list view 291

List/Thumbnail icon 195

listening to music 82, 203–211

listening to voice captions 193, 201

lists 44

Lithium Ion technology 354

loading Web pages 342

locating

blank favorite buttons 79

contacts 58, 59, 92

Sprint PCS Vision user names 111

text 166, 254

location information 95

Location ON option 95, 100

location privacy icon 100

location-based services 95

locations, transmitting 95

lock codes 20, 300

Lock Device screen 302

lock icon 258, 265, 266

Lock Phone options 300

locking smart device 301–302

locking the keyboard 297, 299

logic functions (calculator) 249

losing information 282, 301, 315

Lost Password box 304

Lotus Notes 110

Lotus Notes servers 124, 142

lowercase letters 47

low-lighting conditions 46

M

Mac operating systems

removing applications and 259

requirements for 26

synchronizing with 31, 34

transferring music from 207

transferring pictures from 29

mail. See email

mail servers 124

Mail Service pick list 126, 127

Main View 289

Manage Sound list 133

MAPI servers 124

maps 117, 351

marking private contacts 221

Mask Records setting 303

masking private entries 303

mathematical constants 250

mathematical functions 249

maximizing battery life 16

Maximum message size option 139

MDTV (Mobile Digital TV) 109

media features 16

media formats 206

media players 16

memory

freeing 171, 258, 346

purging events and conserving 231

setting cache 171

memory consumption 346

memos

See also voice memos

synchronizing 33, 34

transferring to smart device 27

Memos application

changing screen font for 287

creating memos and 240

opening 51, 240

updating information in 33, 34

Memos icon 240

Menu button 43

menu button 7

Menu key 46

menus 43, 46

message alerts 151, 157

Message buttons 80

Message Format pick list 139

message preferences 156

Message view (Inbox) 129, 134

messages

See also email; multimedia messages;

text messages

adding Web links to 152

addressing 80

chat sessions and 154

checking status of 101, 102, 232

customizing 156

dialing from 60

drafting 130

inserting emotive symbols in 150

listening to voicemail 64

removing groups of 135

retrieving 65, 101

setting maximum size for 139

sorting 128, 152

truncated 128

Messaging application 146, 150, 156

Messaging button 7, 51, 109

messaging icon (voicemail) 66

metric conversions 249

microphone 9, 68, 83

Microphone sounds pick list 191

Microsoft Excel spreadsheets See Excel files

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts 220, 224, 275

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync servers 124, 141

Microsoft MAPI servers 124

Microsoft Office Manager See Documents application

Microsoft Outlook. See Outlook

Microsoft Windows. See Windows

Microsoft Word documents 242, 243

migrating to Treo smart device 27

military time 288

mirror 8

Mobile Digital TV 109

mobile networks 330

mobile phone. See phone; Treo smart device

model numbers 375

modems 118–119, 354, 355

Money selection 117

monitoring signal strength 100

Month view 225, 233

mouthpiece 9

Movies selection 117

MP3 files 206

MPEG-4 formats 202

Multi-connector port 9

multimedia message icon 155

multimedia messages

addressing 148

attaching to email 131

attaching voice memos to 245

character restrictions for 150

creating 148–150

inserting predefined phrases in 150

online services for 158

sending 150

sending and receiving 109

viewing status of 155

MultiMediaCard cards 276

MultiMediaCards 10

multi-phone accounts 24

multiple recipients 80, 130, 150

music

adjusting volume 209

answering phone calls and 63

changing playlists for 211

downloading 206

listening to 82, 203–211

memory consumption and 346

pausing 209

setting background playback for 210

transferring from CDs 208

music files 206

Mute button 68

N

name preferences 305

names

email accounts and user 126, 127

sorting on 152

Sprint PCS Vision accounts and 111

synchronizing devices and 29

naming

Bluetooth devices 272

email accounts 126

expansion cards 281

favorite buttons 79

picture albums 195

smart device 29, 84, 272

NationalAccess connections 342

Nationwide Sprint PCS Network 98, 109

navigation bar (Web browser) 162

navigator 7, 40

navigator buttons 40

network connections 98, 100, 330–334

Network Selection pick list 99

New Bookmark screen 167

New button 42

New events use time zones box 227

new lines 240

New Message screen 129

news information 116

No Service message 100

nonwireless features 55

Note button 221

notes 221, 231, 236

See also messages

notifications 64, 66, 138

See also alerts

number display formats 250

numbers

displaying as decimals 249, 288

entering 47, 226

formatting 288

storing in calculator 250

Numbers pick list 288

numeric pages 66

0

offline viewing 167

OK button 42

On Demand categories 117

On Demand feature 115–117, 355

On Demand icon 110, 115

On Demand screen 116, 117

On Demand Service 115

On phone power off check box 300

one-touch message access 23

online forums 350

online photo album 200, 201

online services 108

opening

Alert screen 103

application menus 46

applications 50–52, 279

calculator 248

Dial Pad 57, 68

email attachments 133, 143

files 243

text messages 62

Web pages 161, 342

World Clock 246

operating systems 355

Operator Services 352

Optimized mode 343

Option key 46, 47, 50, 355

Option Lock 47

optional passwords 24

options 44, 351

organizer features 16

organizer information 123

Outbox 130, 155

Outbox button 130

outgoing message icon 155

outgoing messages 147

Outlook

accessing 110, 142, 143

calendar events and 231

corporate accounts and 141

entering information with 26

multiple contacts and 220

synchronizing information and 31, 34, 231, 268

time zone information and 227

overdue tasks 232, 237

Owner Preferences screen 305

P

page icon 155

Page view 166

pages 66

paired relationships. See partnerships

Palm Desktop software

corporate accounts and 141

defined 355

entering contacts and 220

entering information with 26

installing 5, 30

security password and 304

synchronizing from 31, 34

Palm Media application 202

Palm online support 350

Palm OS (defined) 355

Palm OS applications 255

See also applications

Palm OS database files 255

Palm OS devices

beaming information to 264

calculating disk space on 27–28

installing synchronization software for 30

transferring information from 27

Palm OS software 27

Palm OS version 378

Palm Powered devices 350

Palm Software Installation CD 5, 30

PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps directory 27

PalmSoftware.pkg icon 31

paper clip icon 131, 133

Partial battery icon 14

partnerships

communicating with 174

creating 85, 272

defined 355

hands-free devices and 84

passkeys 85, 176, 177

Password box 301

password hints 301

passwords

accessing voicemail and 23

adding to phone numbers 68, 80

assigning system 301

changing 24, 304

creating 23, 24, 303

email accounts and 126, 127

entering voicemail 64, 65

forgetting 304

online photo album and 200

Paste command 165

pasting phone numbers 57

pasting text 165

patches 258

Pause button 209

pausing

music 209

voice memos 245

PCs

connecting to 32, 118

interactions with 26

removing applications from 259

transferring music from 206

updating information on 33

PCS service plans. See Sprint PCS Vision

accounts; Sprint Power Vision accounts

PCS Voice Command service. See Sprint

PCS Voice Command service

PDF files 133

pending alerts 151, 228

pending messages 147

performance 16, 84

personal accounts 24, 351, 352

personal address book 76

personal computers. See PCs

personal contacts 110

personal information 24, 301, 305

See also private entries

personal information managers 319

See also PIM software

phone

See also phone calls; phone numbers

accessing directory assistance for 352

accessing operator assistance for 352

adding speed-dial buttons for 79

adjusting ringer volume for 90

answering 23, 62, 63, 71, 87

customizing 88–96

dialing 57–60, 68, 80, 94

enabling as modem 118–119

getting started with 21

hands-free devices and 82, 83, 84

hanging up 7, 67, 69, 72

Internet connections and 119

locking 299

not activated 20

opening applications and 69

power consumption and 16

redialing 61

roaming and 98–99

selecting alert tones for 90

selecting ringtones for 88–89, 91

setting dialing preferences for 93

setting up call waiting for 71

specifications for 378

temporarily disabling 17

text messaging and 150

three-way calling and 72

TTY devices for 96

turning on and off 7, 16, 54, 55

Phone application

accessing Dial Pad from 57

customizing appearance of 92

defined 355

displaying calendar in 225

displaying current events in 93

managing active calls with 67–75

monitoring device status from 100

opening 7, 51, 56

selecting wallpaper for 92, 198

setting caller ID preferences and 91

setting dialing preferences and 93

setting phone preferences and 95

setting roaming preferences and 98

setting sound preferences and 88, 89

phone as modem features 355

phone book 86

See also Address Book

Phone button 7, 56

phone calls

See also phone; phone numbers

adding a second 71

adjusting volume for 21, 90

emergency services for 95, 97

ending 67, 69, 72, 73

forwarding 73–74, 101

making 21, 57–61, 69, 72, 76

managing 67, 74

placing on hold 68, 71

receiving 23, 62–63, 71

routing to Bluetooth devices 85, 86

screening 91

sending to voicemail 62, 72

switching to a second 72

transmitting location during 95

Phone Display Options command 92

Phone Display Options dialog box 92

phone headsets 9, 69, 82, 83

Phone Info command 22, 111

Phone Info screen 22, 111

Phone Lock command 299, 300

phone numbers

adding emergency 300

adding links for 152

adding prefixes to 94

adding to Call forwarding list 74

adding to Contacts list 70

assigning Quick Keys to 78, 79, 80

copying and pasting 57

dialing extra digits for 68, 80, 94

displaying recently dialed 61

entering 57, 58, 92

getting device 22

highlighting 42, 60

selecting 60, 61, 74

setting owner preferences for 305

viewing 59

Phone Off message 100

phone preferences 74, 95

Phone Preferences command 95

Phone Preferences screen 74, 95

Phone screen. See Phone application

phone-to-computer connections 118

photo albums. See albums

Photo Settings screen 191

photos

See also pictures

adding voice captions 188

backing up 202

creating wallpaper with 92, 198

deleting 188

email attachments and 131, 133

printing 158

saving 188, 189

pick lists 42, 44

Pics&Videos application

copying albums and 196

creating albums and 195

opening 193

playing videos and 194

updating information in 33, 34

viewing pictures and 193

viewing slide shows and 194

Pics&Videos button 193

Picture box 91

picture formats 193, 202

Picture Mail

accessing online album for 200

active phone calls and 69

creating messages and 148

defined 356

opening 109

sending messages and 146

setting up Web account for 148

troubleshooting 338

Picture Mail icon 109

Picture Mail message icon 102

Picture Mail Online Services158

Picture Mail service 186

Picture Mail Web site 200

picture thumbnails 232

pictures

See also photos; multimedia messages

adding as backgrounds 232

adding caller ID 91, 110, 186, 221

adding to albums 195

adding to messages 149

assigning to contacts 91, 198

attaching to email 131

copying 196

displaying 193, 200, 202

removing from albums 196, 199

rotating 198

selecting 91

synchronizing 33, 34

taking 8, 91, 187

transferring to smart device 29

uploading 200

PIM software 356

PIMs 319

plain text messages 139

playback 209, 245

playing

music 203–211

streamed media files 216

voice captions 193, 201

playlists 210–211

POP email accounts 138

POP protocol 138

ports 10, 32

power adapter 9, 13, 15, 307

power consumption 16, 17

Power Preferences screen 17, 296

power settings 17, 296

power sources 14

Power Vision accounts. See Sprint Power

Vision accounts

Power/End button 7, 54, 69

caution for pressing 63, 69

Powering off screen 55

PowerPoint files 132, 133, 243

precautions iii, 9, 374

preferences

alerts 89

buttons 292

chat sessions 156

dialing 93

email 136–140

hands-free devices 87

messages 156

phone 74, 95

roaming 98

Preferences dialog box 238

prefixes (phone numbers) 94

Premium Services 24

Preparing Vision Services dialog box 108

preset buttons 78

preset delays 302

pressing onscreen buttons 299

primary application 50

printing 158

prioritizing tasks 235, 239

priority settings

email 130

tasks 235

text messages 147

privacy flag 236

Privacy Mode check box 156

privacy settings 297

Index 407

privacy status icon 100

Private box 303

private contacts 221

private entries 302–304

processor 378

programmable buttons 78

programs. See applications

Prompt sound pick list 191

protecting personal information 24, 302

protecting Treo smart device 297

Protocol pick list 127

proxy servers 172

PSAPs (public safety answering points) 97

public safety answering points 97

punctuation 47

purchasing accessories 307

purchasing batteries 12

purchasing Premium Services 24

Purge command 153, 231, 238

Purge pick list 153

purging. See deleting

push synchronization 143

quarantined applications 27, 29

quarantined files 27, 29

quick buttons 50, 55

Quick Install 355

Quick Install icon 257

Quick Keys 78, 79, 80

Quick Tour 350

QuickText icon 147

R

radio 378

random number generator 249

range (Bluetooth devices) 84, 333

readjusting screen 289

RealOne Player 206

reassigning buttons 7, 292

receiving phone calls 23, 62–63

rechargeable battery. See battery

recharging the battery 16

Record Completion Date check box 238

recording time 190

recording video clips 188, 191

recurring events. See repeating events

red lightning bolt 14

Redial list 61

redialing phone numbers 61

regulatory numbers 375

Reminder Sound pick list 234

reminders. See alerts

Remove from album command 196

removing. See deleting

Rename Card command 281

renaming expansion cards 281

Repeat Alarm pick list 234

repeat intervals (calendar) 229

Repeat pick list 229

repeating events 229, 233

repeating tasks 236

replacement stylus 307

replacing batteries 12, 307, 317

Reply button 129

rescheduling events 231

resets 29, 301, 314–316

resetting smart device 314–316

resolution 187

Resolution pick list 191

restoring defaults 292

restoring information 301

restoring private entries 304

restricting location information 95

retrieving voicemail messages 101

Review photos/videos pick list 192

ringer

adjusting volume 7, 90

silencing 63

ringer switch 10, 63, 284

ringer switch icon 101

Ringers icon 109

Ringtone pick list 91

ringtones

assigning to caller IDs 91, 221

assigning to contacts 91, 92

attaching to email 133

downloading 88, 109

selecting 88–89

roaming 98–99

Roaming icon 98, 101

Roaming message 100

Roaming pick list 89

Roaming Preferences command 99

Roaming Preferences screen 98, 99

roaming status 101

Rotate command 198

rotating pictures 198

Rows pick list 93

S

safe resets 315

safety guidelines 361

safety information iii

Save as Wallpaper command 198

Save Page command 167

saving

email attachments 134

images 164

notes 240

phone numbers 70

photos 188, 189

Web pages 167

schedules. See Calendar application

scheduling events 226

screen

activating items on 42

adjusting brightness 17, 286

automatically turning off 296

customizing 286–289

dimming 51

disabling items on 297

highlighting items on 41

moving around on 40

realigning 289

selecting items on 42

selecting wallpaper for 110

specifications for 378

troubleshooting problems with 320

turning on and off 7, 54, 296, 302

waking up 50, 54, 69

screen fonts 287

screen savers 110

Screen Savers icon 110

screening phone calls 91

screens, scrolling through 41

scroll arrows 41

scrolling 41

SD cards 10, 276

SDIO cards 10, 276

searching for contacts 58, 59, 92

searching for signal 17

secondary application 50

secure connections 174

Secure Digital cards 10, 276

secure Web sites 343

security features 297

Security icon 301, 303, 304

security software 297

Select Media screen 131

selecting

applications 52, 279

chat sessions 154

menu items 43

options in pick lists 44

Web links 161

self-portrait mirror 8

sending

applications over Bluetooth 261

email 130

information over Bluetooth 261

multimedia messages 150

text messages 72, 147

voice memos 245

Sent folder 129, 155

serial numbers 375

servers 124

service plans. See Sprint PCS Vision

accounts; Sprint Power Vision accounts

Setup Devices screen 85, 176

Shift/Find key 47

Short DTMF Tones check box 95

Short Messaging Service (SMS) 356

shortcuts (menus) 43

Show Calendar event check box 93, 225

Show Categories check box 239

Show Category Column check box 233

Show Category List check box 232, 233

Show Completed Items check box 238

410 Index

Show Due Dates check box 238

Show Due Tasks check box 232

Show Favorite buttons check box 93

Show Messages check box 232

Show Priorities check box 239

Show Records setting 303

Show Time Bars check box 232

Show timestamps check box 156

Show Wallpaper option 92

Shutter sound pick list 191

Side button 7,90

signal

locating 55

low coverage areas and 330

monitoring strength 100

searching for 17

sending and receiving 10

Signal faded pick list 90

signal strength 16

signal-ready indicator 55

signal-strength icon 55

Signature command 140

signatures 140

silent alarm 284

sit files 256

Size button 27

Skip Pass Code feature 23

slide shows 194

sliders 41

smartphone. See Treo smart device

SMS (defined) 356

SMS messaging services 338, 339

Snooze button 103

soft resets 314

software 5, 26, 255, 379

See also applications

Software Installation CD 5, 30

software versions 27

Sort by Date command 152

Sort by Name command 152

Sort by pick list 238

sorting messages 128, 152

sorting tasks 238

Sound & Alerts screen 88, 89, 285

sound clips 148

sound files 133

Sound Mode icons 284

Sound Off icon 63

sound preferences 89, 109, 284

Sound Preferences command 88, 89, 233

sound settings. See sound preferences

sounds 89

spare battery 12

speaker 7,9

speakerphone 9, 16, 67

speakers 7

special characters 47, 48, 49

specifications 378

speech-impaired services 96

speed-dial buttons 59, 79

Index 411

speed-dial icon 59

Spkr-phone button 67, 69

Sports selection 117

spreadsheets 242, 243

Sprint 411 352

Sprint Customer Service 24

Sprint PCS Accessory Hotline 307

Sprint PCS Business Connection 122

Sprint PCS Business Connection application 7, 111, 142

Sprint PCS Business Connection icon 110

Sprint PCS Business Connection service 356

Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118

Sprint PCS Operator Services 352

Sprint PCS Service 19

Sprint PCS Service Plan 108

Sprint PCS Vision 356

Sprint PCS Vision accounts 24, 98, 108

Sprint PCS Vision data services 159

Sprint PCS Vision home page 108

Sprint PCS Vision Service 109, 111

Sprint PCS Vision sessions 315

Sprint PCS Vision Smart Device. See Treo smart device

Sprint PCS Vision symbols 109

Sprint PCS Vision user names 111

Sprint PCS Voice Command service 76–77, 98

Sprint PCS Web page 351

Sprint Power Vision accounts 24, 98, 114

Sprint Power Vision connections 114

Sprint Power Vision Network 356

Sprint Power Vision Smart Device. See Treo smart device

Sprint status message 100

Sprint TV application 109, 214–216, 356

SprintTV icon 109

Start With pick list 170

starting Sprint PCS Vision sessions 315

static 331, 333, 373–374

statistical functions 249

status icons (Inbox) 128

status icons (phone) 56, 100

status information 7, 100, 162

stereo adapters 203

stereo headphones 82, 203

stereo headsets 9, 69, 82, 83

stock ticker 117

storage capacity 276

storing

information 346

music files 207

notes 240

numbers 250

pictures 186, 200

video clips 186

streaming 214, 356

stylus 10, 40, 41, 307

sub-account passwords 24

412 Index

suggestions (VersaMail) 129

support 24, 350, 351

Swap button 72

symbols 47, 48, 49, 150, 353

sync button 32, 35

sync cable 26, 32, 35

sync connector 9

synchronization

Bluetooth devices and 271

corporate accounts and 141

defined 33

deleting private entries and 304

desktop software and 34

installing third-party applications for 319

recommendations for 16, 33

removing applications and 258

restrictions for 28

troubleshooting 321–327

upgrades and 28

synchronization applications 31, 34, 322

synchronization complete message 35

synchronization software 26, 29, 30, 31, 319

synchronization-in-progress message 35

synchronizing email 123, 143

synchronizing information 26, 31, 33

See also synchronization

system errors 349

system passwords 301

system requirements 26, 379

system resets 315

System Volume pick list 285

T

Take new picture option 149

Take new video option 149

taking pictures 8, 91, 187

Talk button 7

Tap and Drag pick list 171

tapping 10, 40, 321

Task Details screen 235

tasks

accessing common 78

adding 235

completing 237, 238

customizing 238

deleting 238

displaying 232, 237, 238

prioritizing 235, 239

setting alerts for 239

sorting 238

synchronizing 33, 34

transferring to smart device 27

Tasks application

changing screen fonts for 287

managing tasks with 235–238

setting display options for 237

setting preferences for 238–239

updating information in 33, 34

Index 413

Tasks icon 235

Tasks list screen 237, 238

TDD devices 96

technical support 24, 351

telecommunications devices 96

telephone. See phone

temperature 379

temperature conversions 249

text

changing screen font for 287

copying 165

entering 47, 240, 305

highlighting 42

searching for 166, 254

viewing against pictures 232

text fields 41

text message icon 102, 155

text messages

See also messages; multimedia

messages

addressing 146

character limit for 146

character restrictions for 147

creating 146, 150

deleting 153

dialing from 60

inserting predefined phrases in 147

online services for 158

opening 62

receiving 151

sending 72,147

viewing status of 101, 102, 155

text messaging 16, 80, 109, 146, 154

Text Telephone devices 96

third-party applications

getting help with 257

installing 255, 346

navigator and 40

searching 254

transferring information from 27, 29

troubleshooting 347

uninstalling 315

third-party phone calls 352

third-party utilities 27

three-way calling 72

thumbnail images 92, 232

Thumbnail view 195, 199

time 190, 226, 247

See also clock

time bars 232

time formats 288

time intervals (calendar) 229

Time pick list 288

time stamps 156

Time Zone pick list 226

time zones 226, 294

timed events 226, 228, 233

Timed Events check box 233

tips 350

Tips command 350

414 Index

Tips icon 350

To Do lists. See tasks

top view (device) 10

touchscreen. See screen

Touchscreen command 289

touch-sensitive actions 7

touch-tone dialing 95

transferring calls to voicemail 23

transmitting location information 95

Trash folder 134

travel adapters 307

Treo smart device

activating 5, 20

as wireless modem 354

changing color scheme for 289

changing default applications for 293

compatible hands-free devices for 82

components on 6, 8, 10, 40

components shipped 4

connecting to PCs 26

connecting to power sources 13, 15

customizing 283

entering owner information for 305

entering passwords for 301

extending storage capacity 276

getting additional information about 350

getting phone number for 22

installing applications on 256

locking 301–302

monitoring status of 100–102

naming 84, 272

not turning on 16

removing applications from 258, 259

resetting 29, 301, 314–316

setting date and time for 294

setting up service for 19, 24

specifications for 378

synchronizing with 29, 33

temporarily disabling 17

third-party applications and 29

troubleshooting 350

unlocking 20, 301, 305

upgrading to 27–29

trigonometric functions 249

troubleshooting 319, 350

truncated messages 128

Trusted Devices button 176

trusted devices. See partnerships

trusted pairs. See partnerships

TTY devices 96, 97

TTY/TDD mode icon 101

TTY/TDD preferences 96

turning backlight on and off 46

turning off beeps and alarms 10

turning phone on and off 54, 55

turning screen on and off 54, 296

TV Guide 117

Index 415

U

unanswered calls 23

unauthorized calls 299

unauthorized users 23, 297

uninstalling applications 315

Unknown Caller pick list 89

unlocking Treo smart device 20, 301, 305

unread messages 102, 138, 155, 232

Unread messages check box 138

untimed events 228, 233

Untimed Events check box 233

Update Vision Profile command 349

updates (smart device) 351

updating

information 26, 33

World Clock 294

upgrades 27–29

Upload icon 200

Upload to Online Albums option 200

uploading pictures 200

uppercase letters 47

urgency levels. See priority settings

urgent messages 155

URLs 152, 170, 264

USB docking cradle 307

USB hub 32

USB port 32

USB sync cable 9, 32, 35, 307

Use color for pick list 157

User folder 357

User Guide 350

user names

email accounts and 126, 127

Sprint PCS Vision accounts and 111

V

vehicle charger 15

vehicle power adapter 307

VersaMail

creating and sending messages and 129

customizing 136

deleting messages and 135

downloading attachments and 134

opening 128

retrieving messages and 128

setting priority options and 130

setting up accounts for 124, 125–127

version information 26, 27, 260

VGA resolution 378

Vibrate pick list 88, 89

vibrating alarm 88, 89, 284

video clips

See also multimedia messages

adding to messages 149

attaching to email 131

backing up 202

copying 196

deleting 189

displaying 194, 202

online services for 158

recording 188, 191

removing from albums 196, 199

streaming 214, 216

synchronizing 33, 34

video formats 202

video icon 214

video recording screen 190

View By pick list 291

viewing

alerts 101, 103

alternate characters 48

applications 290, 291

attachments 133, 143

calendar 51

connection status 100, 338, 340

contact information 222

current event 102

decimal values 249, 288

email messages 102, 128

events 93, 233

favorite button assignments 79

items in pick lists 44

menu items 43, 46

numeric pages 66

on-device guide 350

pending alerts 228

phone numbers 59

pictures 193, 200, 202

private entries 303

recently dialed numbers 61

recording time 190

status information 7,100

streamed media 214, 216

tasks 232, 237, 238

tips 350

unread messages 232

video clips 194, 202

Web pages 160, 166, 167

virtual private networks 306

voice captions 188, 193, 194, 201

Voice Command service. See Sprint PCS

Voice Command service

Voice Memo application 244–245

voice memos 132, 148

voicemail

accessing 23, 65, 66

checking status of 101

entering passwords for 23, 64, 65

getting help with 351

playing messages in 64

retrieving messages from 65, 101

roaming and 98

sending calls to 62, 72

setting up 23, 64

viewing numeric pages for 66

voicemail account 23, 24

Voicemail Alert pick list 90

Voicemail button 64, 65, 81

Voicemail icon 64, 96, 101

Index 417

voicemail number 64

voicemail page icon 155

Voicemail Pass Code feature 23

Voicemail Quick Key 78

Voicemail screen 64, 66

volume

alert tones 89

device ringer 7, 88, 90

music 209

phone calls 21, 90

Volume button 7, 21, 90

volume conversions (calculator) 249

Volume pick list 88, 89

VPN clients 306

VPNs (virtual private networks) 306

W

waking up screen 50, 54, 69

wallpaper 92, 110, 186, 198, 289

warm resets 315

warnings iii, 9

Weather selection 117

Web browser

accessing Guest Book from 150

beaming from 264

connecting to Sprint PCS Vision home page from 108

customizing 170–172

downloading files with 163, 164

enabling offline viewing in 167

finding text with 166

installing applications from 256

opening 51

overview 159

setting bookmarks for 167–169

setting default 293

troubleshooting 343

viewing Web pages from 160–162

Web browsing 16, 69, 159

Web icon 110

Web Link buttons 80

Web links 42, 152, 161

Web pages

accessing 152, 159

beaming 264

caching 171

copying text in 165

deleting saved 168

dialing from 60

displaying 160, 166

downloading files from 163, 164

enabling wide layouts for 160

loading 342

locating text in 166

saving 167

saving images on 164

setting default browser for 293

setting default view for 170

setting home page for 170

setting preferences for 170–172

418 Index

signing onto Sprint PCS 351

troubleshooting 341

turning off images in 162

viewing offline 167

viewing status for 162

Web sites 110, 159

Web-based email 122

See also Internet connections

Week starts pick list 288

Week view 225

weights 249

Welcome screen 55

Wide Page Mode 161, 343

Windows operating systems

entering passwords and 304

installing applications from 256

removing applications and 259

requirements for 26

synchronizing with 34

transferring music from 206

wired headsets 82, 83

wireless connections 114

wireless coverage 17

wireless features 16

wireless headsets 82, 84

wireless modems 354

wireless synchronization 141

Word documents 242, 243

Word files 132, 133, 243

World Clock 246–247, 288

World Clock icon 246

World Wide Web. See Web

Wrap Search box 166

Y

Year view 225

Z

ZIP codes 115

zip files 256

zoom settings 187

420 Index